1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */ 2 /* 3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface 4 * 5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc. 6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz> 7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> 8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH 9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH 10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2024 Intel Corporation 11 */ 12 13 #ifndef MAC80211_H 14 #define MAC80211_H 15 16 #include <linux/bug.h> 17 #include <linux/kernel.h> 18 #include <linux/if_ether.h> 19 #include <linux/skbuff.h> 20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h> 21 #include <linux/lockdep.h> 22 #include <net/cfg80211.h> 23 #include <net/codel.h> 24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h> 25 #include <linux/unaligned.h> 26 27 /** 28 * DOC: Introduction 29 * 30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements 31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document 32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware 33 * drivers. 34 */ 35 36 /** 37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts 38 * 39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be 40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any 41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such 42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the 43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even 44 * tasklet function. 45 * 46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also 47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions! 48 */ 49 50 /** 51 * DOC: Warning 52 * 53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will 54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet. 55 */ 56 57 /** 58 * DOC: Frame format 59 * 60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver, 61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are 62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the 63 * hardware. 64 * 65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features: 66 * 67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload 68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware. 69 * 70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to 71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU. 72 */ 73 74 /** 75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue 76 * 77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use. 78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by 79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the 80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback. 81 * 82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during 83 * suspend. 84 * 85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock. 86 * 87 */ 88 89 /** 90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing 91 * 92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the 93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between 94 * different stations/interfaces. 95 * 96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either 97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom 98 * handler. 99 * 100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with 101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and 102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames. 103 * 104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations 105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops. 106 * 107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly. 108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue 109 * driver op. 110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling 111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will 112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation. 113 * 114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to 115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to 116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls 117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using 118 * ieee80211_return_txq(). 119 * 120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has 121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling 122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq 123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls 124 * .release_buffered_frames(). 125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own 126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained 127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue). 128 */ 129 130 /** 131 * DOC: HW timestamping 132 * 133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps 134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks. 135 * 136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing 137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp 138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the 139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct. 140 * 141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine 142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field 143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the 144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct. 145 */ 146 struct device; 147 148 /** 149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues 150 * 151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues. 152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set 153 */ 154 enum ieee80211_max_queues { 155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16, 156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1, 157 }; 158 159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff 160 161 /** 162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211 163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice 164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video 165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort 166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background 167 */ 168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers { 169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0, 170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1, 171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2, 172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3, 173 }; 174 175 /** 176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration 177 * 178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS 179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29. 180 * 181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255] 182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form 183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767] 184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min] 185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled 186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category 187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue 188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured 189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE 190 */ 191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params { 192 u16 txop; 193 u16 cw_min; 194 u16 cw_max; 195 u8 aifs; 196 bool acm; 197 bool uapsd; 198 bool mu_edca; 199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec; 200 }; 201 202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats { 203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount; 204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount; 205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount; 206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount; 207 }; 208 209 /** 210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context 211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed 212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed 213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed 214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel, 215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA 216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF: The min chandef changed 217 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP: The AP channel definition changed, so (wider 218 * bandwidth) OFDMA settings need to be changed 219 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING: The punctured channel(s) bitmap 220 * was changed. 221 */ 222 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change { 223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0), 224 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1), 225 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2), 226 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3), 227 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_DEF = BIT(4), 228 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP = BIT(5), 229 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING = BIT(6), 230 }; 231 232 /** 233 * struct ieee80211_chan_req - A channel "request" 234 * @oper: channel definition to use for operation 235 * @ap: the channel definition of the AP, if any 236 * (otherwise the chan member is %NULL) 237 */ 238 struct ieee80211_chan_req { 239 struct cfg80211_chan_def oper; 240 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 241 }; 242 243 /** 244 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to 245 * 246 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx 247 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only. 248 * 249 * @def: the channel definition 250 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required. 251 * @ap: the channel definition the AP actually is operating as, 252 * for use with (wider bandwidth) OFDMA 253 * @radio_idx: index of the wiphy radio used used for this channel 254 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be 255 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions 256 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled 257 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions; 258 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static. 259 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel. 260 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 261 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information. 262 */ 263 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf { 264 struct cfg80211_chan_def def; 265 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def; 266 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap; 267 268 int radio_idx; 269 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic; 270 271 bool radar_enabled; 272 273 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 274 }; 275 276 /** 277 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode 278 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already 279 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface 280 * needs to be switched from one to the other. 281 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop 282 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but 283 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches 284 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course 285 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing 286 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context 287 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used 288 * for changes/removal.) 289 */ 290 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode { 291 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF, 292 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS, 293 }; 294 295 /** 296 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information 297 * 298 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that 299 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The 300 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be 301 * done. 302 * 303 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx 304 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching 305 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned 306 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned 307 */ 308 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch { 309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 310 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf; 311 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx; 312 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx; 313 }; 314 315 /** 316 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags 317 * 318 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed() 319 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed. 320 * 321 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated), 322 * also implies a change in the AID. 323 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed 324 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed 325 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed 326 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed 327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed 328 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed 329 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever 330 * reason (IBSS and managed mode) 331 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve 332 * new beacon (beaconing modes) 333 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be 334 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes) 335 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed 336 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed 337 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed. 338 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note 339 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode. 340 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface. 341 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode) 342 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode) 343 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode) 344 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface 345 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS) 346 * changed 347 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available: 348 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration. 349 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed, 350 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel 351 * context had been assigned. 352 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed 353 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed 354 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected 355 * keep alive) changed. 356 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface 357 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder 358 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode). 359 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed 360 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed. 361 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed 362 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed. 363 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 364 * status changed. 365 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed. 366 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM: negotiated TID to link mapping was changed 367 * @BSS_CHANGED_TPE: transmit power envelope changed 368 */ 369 enum ieee80211_bss_change { 370 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0, 371 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1, 372 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2, 373 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3, 374 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4, 375 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5, 376 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6, 377 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7, 378 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8, 379 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9, 380 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10, 381 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11, 382 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12, 383 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13, 384 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14, 385 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15, 386 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16, 387 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17, 388 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18, 389 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19, 390 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20, 391 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21, 392 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22, 393 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23, 394 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24, 395 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25, 396 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26, 397 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27, 398 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28, 399 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29, 400 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30, 401 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = BIT_ULL(31), 402 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33), 403 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM = BIT_ULL(34), 404 BSS_CHANGED_TPE = BIT_ULL(35), 405 406 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */ 407 }; 408 409 /* 410 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number 411 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP 412 * filtering will be disabled. 413 */ 414 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4 415 416 /** 417 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver 418 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver. 419 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME 420 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received 421 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because 422 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only 423 * once each time the timeout triggers. 424 */ 425 enum ieee80211_event_type { 426 RSSI_EVENT, 427 MLME_EVENT, 428 BAR_RX_EVENT, 429 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT, 430 }; 431 432 /** 433 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT 434 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver. 435 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver. 436 */ 437 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data { 438 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH, 439 RSSI_EVENT_LOW, 440 }; 441 442 /** 443 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT 444 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data 445 */ 446 struct ieee80211_rssi_event { 447 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data; 448 }; 449 450 /** 451 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 452 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication 453 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association 454 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received.. 455 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent. 456 */ 457 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data { 458 AUTH_EVENT, 459 ASSOC_EVENT, 460 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT, 461 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT, 462 }; 463 464 /** 465 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT 466 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully. 467 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer. 468 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out. 469 */ 470 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status { 471 MLME_SUCCESS, 472 MLME_DENIED, 473 MLME_TIMEOUT, 474 }; 475 476 /** 477 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT 478 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data 479 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status 480 * @reason: the reason code if applicable 481 */ 482 struct ieee80211_mlme_event { 483 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data; 484 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status; 485 u16 reason; 486 }; 487 488 /** 489 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events 490 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates 491 * @tid: the tid 492 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT) 493 */ 494 struct ieee80211_ba_event { 495 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 496 u16 tid; 497 u16 ssn; 498 }; 499 500 /** 501 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver 502 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type. 503 * @u.rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT 504 * @u.mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT 505 * @u.ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT 506 * @u:union holding the fields above 507 */ 508 struct ieee80211_event { 509 enum ieee80211_event_type type; 510 union { 511 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi; 512 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme; 513 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba; 514 } u; 515 }; 516 517 /** 518 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data 519 * 520 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO 521 * 522 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 523 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 524 */ 525 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data { 526 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN]; 527 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN]; 528 }; 529 530 /** 531 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters 532 * 533 * @lci: LCI subelement content 534 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content 535 * @lci_len: LCI data length 536 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length 537 */ 538 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params { 539 const u8 *lci; 540 const u8 *civicloc; 541 size_t lci_len; 542 size_t civicloc_len; 543 }; 544 545 /** 546 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from 547 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail. 548 * 549 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 550 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000) 551 */ 552 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery { 553 u32 min_interval; 554 u32 max_interval; 555 }; 556 557 #define IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ 5 558 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp { 559 bool valid; 560 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_EIRP_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 561 u8 count; 562 }; 563 564 #define IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ 16 565 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd { 566 bool valid; 567 s8 power[IEEE80211_TPE_PSD_ENTRIES_320MHZ]; 568 u8 count, n; 569 }; 570 571 /** 572 * struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe - parsed transmit power envelope information 573 * @max_local: maximum local EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz each 574 * (indexed by TX power category) 575 * @max_reg_client: maximum regulatory client EIRP, one value for 20, 40, 80, 576 * 160, 320 MHz each 577 * (indexed by TX power category) 578 * @psd_local: maximum local power spectral density, one value for each 20 MHz 579 * subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 580 * (indexed by TX power category) 581 * @psd_reg_client: maximum regulatory power spectral density, one value for 582 * each 20 MHz subchannel per bss_conf's chanreq.oper 583 * (indexed by TX power category) 584 */ 585 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe { 586 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_eirp max_local[2], max_reg_client[2]; 587 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe_psd psd_local[2], psd_reg_client[2]; 588 }; 589 590 /** 591 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters 592 * 593 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association 594 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS. 595 * 596 * @vif: reference to owning VIF 597 * @bss: the cfg80211 bss descriptor. Valid only for a station, and only 598 * when associated. Note: This contains information which is not 599 * necessarily authenticated. For example, information coming from probe 600 * responses. 601 * @addr: (link) address used locally 602 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO 603 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE 604 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP 605 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field 606 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us 607 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE 608 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 609 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 610 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed 611 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role) 612 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames 613 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT 614 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection 615 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble 616 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP) 617 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing, 618 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified 619 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then. 620 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old 621 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the 622 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can 623 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after 624 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the 625 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 626 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf, 627 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation 628 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice. 629 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY 630 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts. 631 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync 632 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently 633 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks. 634 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't 635 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this. 636 * @beacon_int: beacon interval 637 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp 638 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an 639 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in 640 * the current band. 641 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate 642 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled) 643 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS 644 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not 645 * @chanreq: Channel request for this BSS -- the hardware might be 646 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example. 647 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data 648 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation. 649 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel. 650 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must 651 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT. 652 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value 653 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should 654 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in 655 * relation to the newly configured threshold. 656 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value 657 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single 658 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it. 659 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold. 660 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis 661 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS. 662 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode. 663 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured. 664 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit 665 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular 666 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is 667 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from 668 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to 669 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace) 670 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave 671 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed 672 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS 673 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support. 674 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from 675 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated. 676 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include 677 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element. 678 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN 679 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the 680 * station. 681 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM 682 * responder functionality. 683 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder. 684 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile 685 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP 686 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set 687 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set 688 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of 689 * nontransmitted BSSIDs 690 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received 691 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set. 692 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are 693 * connected to (STA) 694 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters. 695 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE 696 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration 697 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response 698 * interval. 699 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed 700 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware. 701 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz 702 * @tpe: transmit power envelope information 703 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS. 704 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT 705 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. 706 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability 707 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL 708 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX 709 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always 710 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be 711 * processed after it switches back to %NULL. 712 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. 713 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change. 714 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability. 715 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability. 716 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability. 717 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 718 * beamformer 719 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU 720 * beamformee 721 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 722 * beamformer 723 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU 724 * beamformee 725 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 726 * beamformer 727 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU 728 * beamformee 729 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU 730 * beamformer 731 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission 732 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 733 * bandwidth 734 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 735 * beamformer 736 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU 737 * beamformee 738 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU 739 * beamformer 740 * @eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo: in AP-mode, does this BSS support the 741 * reception of an EHT TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU 742 * bandwidth 743 * @bss_param_ch_cnt: in BSS-mode, the BSS params change count. This 744 * information is the latest known value. It can come from this link's 745 * beacon or from a beacon sent by another link. 746 * @bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id: in BSS-mode, the link_id to which the beacon 747 * that updated &bss_param_ch_cnt belongs. E.g. if link 1 doesn't hear 748 * its beacons, and link 2 sent a beacon with an RNR element that updated 749 * link 1's BSS params change count, then, link 1's 750 * bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will be 2. That means that link 1 knows that 751 * link 2 was the link that updated its bss_param_ch_cnt value. 752 * In case link 1 hears its beacon again, bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id will 753 * be updated to 1, even if bss_param_ch_cnt didn't change. This allows 754 * the link to know that it heard the latest value from its own beacon 755 * (as opposed to hearing its value from another link's beacon). 756 */ 757 struct ieee80211_bss_conf { 758 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 759 struct cfg80211_bss *bss; 760 761 const u8 *bssid; 762 unsigned int link_id; 763 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 764 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext; 765 bool uora_exists; 766 u8 uora_ocw_range; 767 u16 frame_time_rts_th; 768 bool he_support; 769 bool twt_requester; 770 bool twt_responder; 771 bool twt_protected; 772 bool twt_broadcast; 773 /* erp related data */ 774 bool use_cts_prot; 775 bool use_short_preamble; 776 bool use_short_slot; 777 bool enable_beacon; 778 u8 dtim_period; 779 u16 beacon_int; 780 u16 assoc_capability; 781 u64 sync_tsf; 782 u32 sync_device_ts; 783 u8 sync_dtim_count; 784 u32 basic_rates; 785 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate; 786 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 787 u16 ht_operation_mode; 788 s32 cqm_rssi_thold; 789 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst; 790 s32 cqm_rssi_low; 791 s32 cqm_rssi_high; 792 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq; 793 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group; 794 bool qos; 795 bool hidden_ssid; 796 int txpower; 797 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type; 798 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr; 799 bool allow_p2p_go_ps; 800 u16 max_idle_period; 801 bool protected_keep_alive; 802 bool ftm_responder; 803 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params; 804 /* Multiple BSSID data */ 805 bool nontransmitted; 806 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN]; 807 u8 bssid_index; 808 u8 bssid_indicator; 809 bool ema_ap; 810 u8 profile_periodicity; 811 struct { 812 u32 params; 813 u16 nss_set; 814 } he_oper; 815 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd; 816 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color; 817 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery; 818 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval; 819 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate; 820 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type; 821 822 struct ieee80211_parsed_tpe tpe; 823 824 u8 pwr_reduction; 825 bool eht_support; 826 827 bool csa_active; 828 829 bool mu_mimo_owner; 830 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf; 831 832 bool color_change_active; 833 u8 color_change_color; 834 835 bool ht_ldpc; 836 bool vht_ldpc; 837 bool he_ldpc; 838 bool vht_su_beamformer; 839 bool vht_su_beamformee; 840 bool vht_mu_beamformer; 841 bool vht_mu_beamformee; 842 bool he_su_beamformer; 843 bool he_su_beamformee; 844 bool he_mu_beamformer; 845 bool he_full_ul_mumimo; 846 bool eht_su_beamformer; 847 bool eht_su_beamformee; 848 bool eht_mu_beamformer; 849 bool eht_80mhz_full_bw_ul_mumimo; 850 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt; 851 u8 bss_param_ch_cnt_link_id; 852 }; 853 854 /** 855 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status 856 * 857 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info. 858 * 859 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame. 860 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence 861 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment 862 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the 863 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly 864 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly 865 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from 866 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing. 867 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to 868 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE 869 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for 870 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field. 871 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack 872 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination 873 * station 874 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame 875 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon 876 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU 877 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211. 878 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted 879 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to 880 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or 881 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station 882 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on 883 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for 884 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above), 885 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the 886 * hardware queue. 887 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged 888 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status 889 * is for the whole aggregation. 890 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned, 891 * so consider using block ack request (BAR). 892 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be 893 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will 894 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment) 895 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate 896 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for 897 * off-channel operation. 898 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation 899 * (header conversion) 900 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211, 901 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS 902 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211, 903 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted 904 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll 905 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must 906 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode. 907 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the 908 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used 909 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the 910 * queue gets full. 911 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted 912 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not 913 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.) 914 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME 915 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status 916 * should kick the MLME state machine. 917 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211 918 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX 919 * status to user space) 920 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame 921 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this 922 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use. 923 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on 924 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done 925 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be 926 * handled properly by the device. 927 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP 928 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow 929 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested. 930 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate. 931 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P 932 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band. 933 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period, 934 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in 935 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames 936 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for 937 * PS-Poll responses. 938 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate. 939 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when 940 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose. 941 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it 942 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for 943 * monitor injection). 944 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with 945 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without 946 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW). 947 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack 948 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK. 949 * 950 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't 951 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary. 952 */ 953 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags { 954 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0), 955 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1), 956 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2), 957 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3), 958 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4), 959 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5), 960 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6), 961 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7), 962 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8), 963 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9), 964 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10), 965 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11), 966 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12), 967 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13), 968 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14), 969 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15), 970 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16), 971 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17), 972 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18), 973 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19), 974 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20), 975 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21), 976 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22), 977 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24), 978 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25), 979 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26), 980 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27), 981 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28), 982 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29), 983 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30), 984 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31), 985 }; 986 987 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23 988 989 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS 990 991 /** 992 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control 993 * 994 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control 995 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP) 996 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll 997 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD). 998 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information 999 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame 1000 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path 1001 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup 1002 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211, 1003 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before 1004 * it can be sent out. 1005 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that 1006 * has already been assigned to this frame. 1007 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered 1008 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent 1009 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values. 1010 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally 1011 * for sequence number assignment 1012 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK: Don't use rate mask for this frame 1013 * which is transmitted due to scanning or offchannel TX, not in normal 1014 * operation on the interface. 1015 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this 1016 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is 1017 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is 1018 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame 1019 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if 1020 * it's intended for an MLD. 1021 * 1022 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags. 1023 */ 1024 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags { 1025 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0), 1026 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1), 1027 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2), 1028 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3), 1029 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4), 1030 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5), 1031 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6), 1032 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7), 1033 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8), 1034 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9), 1035 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK = BIT(10), 1036 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000, 1037 }; 1038 1039 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf 1040 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \ 1041 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \ 1042 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK) 1043 1044 /** 1045 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status 1046 * 1047 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid 1048 * 1049 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags. 1050 */ 1051 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags { 1052 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0), 1053 }; 1054 1055 /* 1056 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are 1057 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack. 1058 */ 1059 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \ 1060 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \ 1061 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \ 1062 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \ 1063 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \ 1064 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \ 1065 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \ 1066 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 1067 1068 /** 1069 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the 1070 * Rate Control algorithm. 1071 * 1072 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx, 1073 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate. 1074 * 1075 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate. 1076 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required. 1077 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection. 1078 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble. 1079 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate. 1080 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split 1081 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number) 1082 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in 1083 * Greenfield mode. 1084 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz. 1085 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission 1086 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission 1087 * (80+80 isn't supported yet) 1088 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the 1089 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is 1090 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS. 1091 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate. 1092 */ 1093 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags { 1094 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0), 1095 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1), 1096 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2), 1097 1098 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */ 1099 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3), 1100 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4), 1101 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5), 1102 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6), 1103 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7), 1104 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8), 1105 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9), 1106 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10), 1107 }; 1108 1109 1110 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */ 1111 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40 1112 1113 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */ 1114 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24 1115 1116 /* maximum number of rate stages */ 1117 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4 1118 1119 /* maximum number of rate table entries */ 1120 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4 1121 1122 /** 1123 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status 1124 * 1125 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with 1126 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags) 1127 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate 1128 * 1129 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used 1130 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried. 1131 * 1132 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should 1133 * always report the rate along with the flags it used. 1134 * 1135 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs 1136 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate 1137 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example, 1138 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the 1139 * information:: 1140 * 1141 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 } 1142 * 1143 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted 1144 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four 1145 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets 1146 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status 1147 * information should then contain:: 1148 * 1149 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ... 1150 * 1151 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2 1152 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement. 1153 */ 1154 struct ieee80211_tx_rate { 1155 s8 idx; 1156 u16 count:5, 1157 flags:11; 1158 } __packed; 1159 1160 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31 1161 1162 static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1163 { 1164 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0; 1165 } 1166 1167 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate, 1168 u8 mcs, u8 nss) 1169 { 1170 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF); 1171 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7); 1172 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs; 1173 } 1174 1175 static inline u8 1176 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1177 { 1178 return rate->idx & 0xF; 1179 } 1180 1181 static inline u8 1182 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate) 1183 { 1184 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1; 1185 } 1186 1187 /** 1188 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information 1189 * 1190 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses: 1191 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do 1192 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable) 1193 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened 1194 * 1195 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above 1196 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races), 1197 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which 1198 * link the frame will be transmitted on 1199 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC 1200 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately, 1201 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation 1202 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame 1203 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally 1204 * @control: union part for control data 1205 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try 1206 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS 1207 * @control.use_rts: use RTS 1208 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS 1209 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only) 1210 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table 1211 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients 1212 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL) 1213 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL) 1214 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags 1215 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs) 1216 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space 1217 * @pad: padding 1218 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates 1219 * @status: union part for status data 1220 * @status.rates: attempted rates 1221 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal 1222 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length 1223 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length 1224 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy) 1225 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only 1226 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness 1227 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags 1228 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area 1229 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data 1230 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK 1231 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers 1232 */ 1233 struct ieee80211_tx_info { 1234 /* common information */ 1235 u32 flags; 1236 u32 band:3, 1237 status_data_idr:1, 1238 status_data:13, 1239 hw_queue:4, 1240 tx_time_est:10; 1241 /* 1 free bit */ 1242 1243 union { 1244 struct { 1245 union { 1246 /* rate control */ 1247 struct { 1248 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[ 1249 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1250 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx; 1251 u8 use_rts:1; 1252 u8 use_cts_prot:1; 1253 u8 short_preamble:1; 1254 u8 skip_table:1; 1255 1256 /* for injection only (bitmap) */ 1257 u8 antennas:2; 1258 1259 /* 14 bits free */ 1260 }; 1261 /* only needed before rate control */ 1262 unsigned long jiffies; 1263 }; 1264 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */ 1265 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 1266 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key; 1267 u32 flags; 1268 codel_time_t enqueue_time; 1269 } control; 1270 struct { 1271 u64 cookie; 1272 } ack; 1273 struct { 1274 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1275 s32 ack_signal; 1276 u8 ampdu_ack_len; 1277 u8 ampdu_len; 1278 u8 antenna; 1279 u8 pad; 1280 u16 tx_time; 1281 u8 flags; 1282 u8 pad2; 1283 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)]; 1284 } status; 1285 struct { 1286 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[ 1287 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES]; 1288 u8 pad[4]; 1289 1290 void *rate_driver_data[ 1291 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1292 }; 1293 void *driver_data[ 1294 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)]; 1295 }; 1296 }; 1297 1298 static inline u16 1299 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est) 1300 { 1301 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime 1302 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1 1303 */ 1304 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2; 1305 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1306 } 1307 1308 static inline u16 1309 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1310 { 1311 return info->tx_time_est << 2; 1312 } 1313 1314 /*** 1315 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path 1316 * 1317 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a 1318 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet. 1319 * 1320 * @rate_idx The actual used rate. 1321 * @try_count How often the rate was tried. 1322 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the 1323 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level 1324 * that was used when sending the packet. 1325 */ 1326 struct ieee80211_rate_status { 1327 struct rate_info rate_idx; 1328 u8 try_count; 1329 u8 tx_power_idx; 1330 }; 1331 1332 /** 1333 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control 1334 * 1335 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for 1336 * @info: Basic tx status information 1337 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver) 1338 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet 1339 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates) 1340 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver 1341 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds 1342 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action 1343 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1344 */ 1345 struct ieee80211_tx_status { 1346 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 1347 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info; 1348 struct sk_buff *skb; 1349 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates; 1350 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp; 1351 u8 n_rates; 1352 1353 struct list_head *free_list; 1354 }; 1355 1356 /** 1357 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs 1358 * 1359 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan 1360 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace 1361 * and the ones generated by mac80211. 1362 * 1363 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs. 1364 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs. 1365 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones) 1366 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies 1367 */ 1368 struct ieee80211_scan_ies { 1369 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1370 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 1371 const u8 *common_ies; 1372 size_t common_ie_len; 1373 }; 1374 1375 1376 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1377 { 1378 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb; 1379 } 1380 1381 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb) 1382 { 1383 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb; 1384 } 1385 1386 /** 1387 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status 1388 * 1389 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared. 1390 * 1391 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report 1392 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything 1393 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear 1394 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway). 1395 * 1396 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the 1397 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore 1398 * any fields it needs after calling this helper. 1399 */ 1400 static inline void 1401 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 1402 { 1403 int i; 1404 1405 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1406 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates)); 1407 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 1408 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates)); 1409 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8); 1410 /* clear the rate counts */ 1411 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++) 1412 info->status.rates[i].count = 0; 1413 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates); 1414 } 1415 1416 1417 /** 1418 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags 1419 * 1420 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status. 1421 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame. 1422 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED. 1423 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware. 1424 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame, 1425 * verification has been done by the hardware. 1426 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame. 1427 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection 1428 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that. 1429 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this 1430 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection. 1431 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame 1432 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set) 1433 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did 1434 * de-duplication by itself. 1435 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on 1436 * the frame. 1437 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on 1438 * the frame. 1439 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1440 * field) is valid if this field is non-zero, and the position 1441 * where the timestamp was sampled depends on the value. 1442 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1443 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU 1444 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS 1445 * merging. 1446 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1447 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU 1448 * (including FCS) was received. 1449 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime 1450 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received. 1451 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64: The timestamp passed in the RX status @mactime 1452 * is only for use in the radiotap timestamp header, not otherwise a valid 1453 * @mactime value. Note this is a separate flag so that we continue to see 1454 * %RX_FLAG_MACTIME as unset. Also note that in this case the timestamp is 1455 * reported to be 64 bits wide, not just 32. 1456 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present. 1457 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU) 1458 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference 1459 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for 1460 * each A-MPDU 1461 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all 1462 * subframes of a single A-MPDU 1463 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU 1464 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected 1465 * on this subframe 1466 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was 1467 * done by the hardware 1468 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without 1469 * processing it in any regular way. 1470 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1471 * them for sniffing purposes. 1472 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except 1473 * monitor interfaces. 1474 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report 1475 * them for sniffing purposes. 1476 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU 1477 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons. 1478 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g. 1479 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while 1480 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to 1481 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU 1482 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be 1483 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be 1484 * interleaved with other frames. 1485 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the 1486 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header). 1487 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point 1488 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV 1489 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs 1490 * in the skb. 1491 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before. 1492 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as 1493 * the first subframe. 1494 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must 1495 * be done in the hardware. 1496 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this 1497 * frame 1498 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known 1499 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present 1500 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in 1501 * 1502 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS 1503 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM 1504 * - DATA3_CODING 1505 * - DATA5_GI 1506 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC 1507 * - DATA6_NSTS 1508 * - DATA3_STBC 1509 * 1510 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data) 1511 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present 1512 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu) 1513 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present 1514 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with 1515 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is 1516 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't 1517 * known the frame shouldn't be reported. 1518 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by 1519 * hardware or driver) 1520 */ 1521 enum mac80211_rx_flags { 1522 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0), 1523 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1), 1524 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(2), 1525 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3), 1526 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4), 1527 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5), 1528 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6), 1529 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64 = BIT(7), 1530 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8), 1531 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9), 1532 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10), 1533 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11), 1534 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12), 1535 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13), 1536 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14), 1537 /* one free bit at 15 */ 1538 RX_FLAG_MACTIME = BIT(16) | BIT(17), 1539 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = 1 << 16, 1540 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = 2 << 16, 1541 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = 3 << 16, 1542 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18), 1543 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19), 1544 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20), 1545 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21), 1546 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22), 1547 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23), 1548 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24), 1549 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25), 1550 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26), 1551 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27), 1552 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28), 1553 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29), 1554 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30), 1555 }; 1556 1557 /** 1558 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags 1559 * 1560 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame 1561 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used 1562 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, 1563 * if the driver fills this value it should add 1564 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT 1565 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact. 1566 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used 1567 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3 1568 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed 1569 */ 1570 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags { 1571 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0), 1572 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2), 1573 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3), 1574 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5), 1575 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6), 1576 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7), 1577 }; 1578 1579 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4 1580 1581 enum mac80211_rx_encoding { 1582 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0, 1583 RX_ENC_HT, 1584 RX_ENC_VHT, 1585 RX_ENC_HE, 1586 RX_ENC_EHT, 1587 }; 1588 1589 /** 1590 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status 1591 * 1592 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset 1593 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received 1594 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb). 1595 * 1596 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function 1597 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware. 1598 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is 1599 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache. 1600 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only 1601 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames. 1602 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled. 1603 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use 1604 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation 1605 * @band: the active band when this frame was received 1606 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz 1607 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed 1608 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting. 1609 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz. 1610 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or 1611 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags 1612 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_* 1613 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength 1614 * values were filled. 1615 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't 1616 * support dB or unspecified units) 1617 * @antenna: antenna used 1618 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if 1619 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT) 1620 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE and EHT only) 1621 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\* 1622 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding 1623 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw 1624 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags 1625 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc 1626 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi 1627 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value 1628 * @eht: EHT specific rate information 1629 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc 1630 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi 1631 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211 1632 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for 1633 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU 1634 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU 1635 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag 1636 * is set only when connection is MLO. 1637 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with 1638 * @link_valid. 1639 */ 1640 struct ieee80211_rx_status { 1641 u64 mactime; 1642 union { 1643 u64 boottime_ns; 1644 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp; 1645 }; 1646 u32 device_timestamp; 1647 u32 ampdu_reference; 1648 u32 flag; 1649 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1; 1650 u8 enc_flags; 1651 u8 encoding:3, bw:4; 1652 union { 1653 struct { 1654 u8 he_ru:3; 1655 u8 he_gi:2; 1656 u8 he_dcm:1; 1657 }; 1658 struct { 1659 u8 ru:4; 1660 u8 gi:2; 1661 } eht; 1662 }; 1663 u8 rate_idx; 1664 u8 nss; 1665 u8 rx_flags; 1666 u8 band; 1667 u8 antenna; 1668 s8 signal; 1669 u8 chains; 1670 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS]; 1671 u8 zero_length_psdu_type; 1672 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4; 1673 }; 1674 1675 static inline u32 1676 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status) 1677 { 1678 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) + 1679 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0); 1680 } 1681 1682 /** 1683 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags 1684 * 1685 * Flags to define PHY configuration options 1686 * 1687 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this 1688 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets 1689 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags! 1690 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only). 1691 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2, 1692 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to 1693 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames. 1694 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states, 1695 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support" 1696 * for more. 1697 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set 1698 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but 1699 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will 1700 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but 1701 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active. 1702 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main 1703 * operating channel. 1704 */ 1705 enum ieee80211_conf_flags { 1706 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0), 1707 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1), 1708 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2), 1709 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3), 1710 }; 1711 1712 1713 /** 1714 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed 1715 * 1716 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed 1717 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed 1718 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed 1719 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed 1720 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed 1721 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed 1722 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed 1723 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed 1724 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1725 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1726 */ 1727 enum ieee80211_conf_changed { 1728 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1), 1729 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2), 1730 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3), 1731 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4), 1732 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5), 1733 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6), 1734 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7), 1735 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8), 1736 }; 1737 1738 /** 1739 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode 1740 * 1741 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic 1742 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off 1743 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static 1744 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic 1745 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use 1746 */ 1747 enum ieee80211_smps_mode { 1748 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC, 1749 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF, 1750 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC, 1751 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC, 1752 1753 /* keep last */ 1754 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES, 1755 }; 1756 1757 /** 1758 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device 1759 * 1760 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware. 1761 * 1762 * @flags: configuration flags defined above 1763 * 1764 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval 1765 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use 1766 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon 1767 * has been received and the DTIM period is known. 1768 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the 1769 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when 1770 * the CONF_PS flag is set. 1771 * 1772 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility 1773 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces 1774 * 1775 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to 1776 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled 1777 * 1778 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame 1779 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11, 1780 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries 1781 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short" 1782 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the 1783 * number of transmissions not the number of retries 1784 * 1785 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that 1786 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not 1787 * configured for an HT channel. 1788 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used, 1789 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed. 1790 */ 1791 struct ieee80211_conf { 1792 u32 flags; 1793 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout; 1794 1795 u16 listen_interval; 1796 u8 ps_dtim_period; 1797 1798 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count; 1799 1800 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1801 bool radar_enabled; 1802 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 1803 }; 1804 1805 /** 1806 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data 1807 * 1808 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch 1809 * operation. 1810 * 1811 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization 1812 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch 1813 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter 1814 * the driver passed into mac80211. 1815 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the 1816 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211. 1817 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the 1818 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP. 1819 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to 1820 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event 1821 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in 1822 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new 1823 * channel, expressed in TU. 1824 * @link_id: the link ID of the link doing the channel switch, 0 for non-MLO 1825 */ 1826 struct ieee80211_channel_switch { 1827 u64 timestamp; 1828 u32 device_timestamp; 1829 bool block_tx; 1830 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef; 1831 u8 count; 1832 u8 link_id; 1833 u32 delay; 1834 }; 1835 1836 /** 1837 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags 1838 * 1839 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering 1840 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups 1841 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality 1842 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor 1843 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and 1844 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached. 1845 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this 1846 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition, 1847 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is 1848 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces. 1849 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes 1850 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even 1851 * this is not pure P2P vif. 1852 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is 1853 * enabled for the interface. 1854 * @IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW: Ignore wider bandwidth OFDMA 1855 * operation on this interface and request a channel context without 1856 * the AP definition. Use this e.g. because the device is able to 1857 * handle OFDMA (downlink and trigger for uplink) on a per-AP basis. 1858 */ 1859 enum ieee80211_vif_flags { 1860 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0), 1861 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1), 1862 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2), 1863 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3), 1864 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4), 1865 IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW = BIT(5), 1866 }; 1867 1868 1869 /** 1870 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags 1871 * 1872 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled 1873 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211. 1874 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface. 1875 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload 1876 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled 1877 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to 1878 * mac80211. 1879 */ 1880 1881 enum ieee80211_offload_flags { 1882 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0), 1883 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1), 1884 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2), 1885 }; 1886 1887 /** 1888 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration 1889 * @assoc: association status 1890 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not 1891 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created 1892 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by 1893 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations. 1894 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true 1895 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001j. 1896 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in 1897 * P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001i. 1898 * @mld_capa_op: MLD Capabilities and Operations per P802.11be_D4.1 1899 * Figure 9-1001k 1900 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The 1901 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here. 1902 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here 1903 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass. 1904 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this 1905 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list 1906 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case. 1907 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode. 1908 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid. 1909 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format). 1910 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the 1911 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what 1912 * your driver/device needs to do. 1913 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections 1914 * (station mode only) 1915 */ 1916 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg { 1917 /* association related data */ 1918 bool assoc, ibss_joined; 1919 bool ibss_creator; 1920 bool ps; 1921 u16 aid; 1922 u16 eml_cap; 1923 u16 eml_med_sync_delay; 1924 u16 mld_capa_op; 1925 1926 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN]; 1927 int arp_addr_cnt; 1928 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN]; 1929 size_t ssid_len; 1930 bool s1g; 1931 bool idle; 1932 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 1933 }; 1934 1935 #define IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS 8 1936 1937 /** 1938 * struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm - negotiated TID to link map info 1939 * 1940 * @downlink: bitmap of active links per TID for downlink, or 0 if mapping for 1941 * this TID is not included. 1942 * @uplink: bitmap of active links per TID for uplink, or 0 if mapping for this 1943 * TID is not included. 1944 * @valid: info is valid or not. 1945 */ 1946 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm { 1947 u16 downlink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 1948 u16 uplink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS]; 1949 bool valid; 1950 }; 1951 1952 /** 1953 * enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res - return value for negotiated TTLM handling 1954 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT: accept the request 1955 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT: reject the request 1956 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED: reject and suggest a new mapping 1957 */ 1958 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res { 1959 NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT, 1960 NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT, 1961 NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED 1962 }; 1963 1964 /** 1965 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data 1966 * 1967 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver 1968 * use during the life of a virtual interface. 1969 * 1970 * @type: type of this virtual interface 1971 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg 1972 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own 1973 * or the BSS we're associated to 1974 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration, 1975 * indexed by link ID 1976 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1977 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO. 1978 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the 1979 * API calls meant for that purpose. 1980 * @dormant_links: subset of the valid links that are disabled/suspended 1981 * due to advertised or negotiated TTLM respectively. 1982 * 0 for non-MLO. 1983 * @suspended_links: subset of dormant_links representing links that are 1984 * suspended due to negotiated TTLM, and could be activated in the 1985 * future by tearing down the TTLM negotiation. 1986 * 0 for non-MLO. 1987 * @neg_ttlm: negotiated TID to link mapping info. 1988 * see &struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm. 1989 * @addr: address of this interface 1990 * @addr_valid: indicates if the address is actively used. Set to false for 1991 * passive monitor interfaces, true in all other cases. 1992 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p 1993 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively 1994 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this 1995 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver 1996 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup 1997 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM) 1998 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface, 1999 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added 2000 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed 2001 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field 2002 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface. 2003 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface, 2004 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver 2005 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change 2006 * restrictions. 2007 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC 2008 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only 2009 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per 2010 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual 2011 * monitor interface (if that is requested.) 2012 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this 2013 * interface. 2014 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211 2015 * for this interface. 2016 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2017 * sizeof(void \*). 2018 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue 2019 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see 2020 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags. 2021 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled. 2022 */ 2023 struct ieee80211_vif { 2024 enum nl80211_iftype type; 2025 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg; 2026 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf; 2027 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2028 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links, suspended_links; 2029 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm neg_ttlm; 2030 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2031 bool addr_valid; 2032 bool p2p; 2033 2034 u8 cab_queue; 2035 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS]; 2036 2037 struct ieee80211_txq *txq; 2038 2039 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 2040 u32 driver_flags; 2041 u32 offload_flags; 2042 2043 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 2044 struct dentry *debugfs_dir; 2045 #endif 2046 2047 bool probe_req_reg; 2048 bool rx_mcast_action_reg; 2049 2050 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif; 2051 2052 /* must be last */ 2053 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2054 }; 2055 2056 /** 2057 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif 2058 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested 2059 * Return: the usable link bitmap 2060 */ 2061 static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2062 { 2063 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links; 2064 } 2065 2066 /** 2067 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one 2068 * @vif: the vif 2069 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise. 2070 */ 2071 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2072 { 2073 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */ 2074 return vif->valid_links != 0; 2075 } 2076 2077 /** 2078 * ieee80211_vif_link_active - check if a given link is active 2079 * @vif: the vif 2080 * @link_id: the link ID to check 2081 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD and the link is active, or if 2082 * the vif is not an MLD and the link ID is 0; %false otherwise. 2083 */ 2084 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_link_active(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 2085 unsigned int link_id) 2086 { 2087 if (!ieee80211_vif_is_mld(vif)) 2088 return link_id == 0; 2089 return vif->active_links & BIT(link_id); 2090 } 2091 2092 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \ 2093 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \ 2094 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2095 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2096 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id))) 2097 2098 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2099 { 2100 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH 2101 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT; 2102 #endif 2103 return false; 2104 } 2105 2106 /** 2107 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev 2108 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for 2109 * 2110 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2111 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev. 2112 * 2113 * Return: pointer to the wdev, or %NULL if the given wdev isn't 2114 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor 2115 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.) 2116 */ 2117 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev); 2118 2119 /** 2120 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif 2121 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for 2122 * 2123 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs 2124 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif. 2125 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif. 2126 * 2127 * Return: pointer to the wdev 2128 */ 2129 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 2130 2131 static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 2132 { 2133 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx); 2134 } 2135 2136 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \ 2137 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2138 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2139 2140 #define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \ 2141 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \ 2142 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif)) 2143 2144 /** 2145 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags 2146 * 2147 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver 2148 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf. 2149 * 2150 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the 2151 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this 2152 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs 2153 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC. 2154 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by 2155 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC 2156 * generation in software. 2157 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates 2158 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key. 2159 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a 2160 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames 2161 * (MFP) to be done in software. 2162 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver 2163 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV 2164 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with 2165 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does 2166 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or 2167 * MIC. 2168 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received 2169 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware 2170 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames 2171 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and 2172 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with 2173 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the 2174 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW. 2175 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the 2176 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation 2177 * only for management frames (MFP). 2178 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the 2179 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always 2180 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled. 2181 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for 2182 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with 2183 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key. 2184 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation. 2185 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver 2186 * for a AES_CMAC or a AES_GMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence 2187 * number generation only 2188 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU: SPP A-MSDUs can be used with this key 2189 * (set by mac80211 from the sta->spp_amsdu flag) 2190 */ 2191 enum ieee80211_key_flags { 2192 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0), 2193 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1), 2194 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2), 2195 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3), 2196 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4), 2197 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5), 2198 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6), 2199 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7), 2200 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8), 2201 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9), 2202 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10), 2203 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU = BIT(11), 2204 }; 2205 2206 /** 2207 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information 2208 * 2209 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by 2210 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops. 2211 * 2212 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver 2213 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be 2214 * encrypted in hardware. 2215 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector. 2216 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it 2217 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO) 2218 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags. 2219 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3) 2220 * @keylen: key material length 2221 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte) 2222 * data block: 2223 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits) 2224 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits) 2225 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits) 2226 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type 2227 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type 2228 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys 2229 */ 2230 struct ieee80211_key_conf { 2231 atomic64_t tx_pn; 2232 u32 cipher; 2233 u8 icv_len; 2234 u8 iv_len; 2235 u8 hw_key_idx; 2236 s8 keyidx; 2237 u16 flags; 2238 s8 link_id; 2239 u8 keylen; 2240 u8 key[]; 2241 }; 2242 2243 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16 2244 2245 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff)) 2246 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff)) 2247 2248 /** 2249 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter 2250 * 2251 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order 2252 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2253 * reverse order than in packet) 2254 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2255 * reverse order than in packet) 2256 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2257 * reverse order than in packet) 2258 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian, 2259 * reverse order than in packet) 2260 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys 2261 */ 2262 struct ieee80211_key_seq { 2263 union { 2264 struct { 2265 u32 iv32; 2266 u16 iv16; 2267 } tkip; 2268 struct { 2269 u8 pn[6]; 2270 } ccmp; 2271 struct { 2272 u8 pn[6]; 2273 } aes_cmac; 2274 struct { 2275 u8 pn[6]; 2276 } aes_gmac; 2277 struct { 2278 u8 pn[6]; 2279 } gcmp; 2280 struct { 2281 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN]; 2282 u8 seq_len; 2283 } hw; 2284 }; 2285 }; 2286 2287 /** 2288 * enum set_key_cmd - key command 2289 * 2290 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2291 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added. 2292 * 2293 * @SET_KEY: a key is set 2294 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled 2295 */ 2296 enum set_key_cmd { 2297 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY, 2298 }; 2299 2300 /** 2301 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state 2302 * 2303 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all, 2304 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions 2305 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state 2306 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated 2307 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated 2308 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X) 2309 */ 2310 enum ieee80211_sta_state { 2311 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */ 2312 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST, 2313 IEEE80211_STA_NONE, 2314 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH, 2315 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC, 2316 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED, 2317 }; 2318 2319 /** 2320 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth 2321 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz 2322 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz 2323 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz 2324 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz 2325 * (including 80+80 MHz) 2326 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz 2327 * 2328 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized 2329 * correctly, the values must be sorted. 2330 */ 2331 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth { 2332 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0, 2333 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40, 2334 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80, 2335 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160, 2336 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320, 2337 }; 2338 2339 /** 2340 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table 2341 * 2342 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update 2343 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default. 2344 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control. 2345 */ 2346 struct ieee80211_sta_rates { 2347 struct rcu_head rcu_head; 2348 struct { 2349 s8 idx; 2350 u8 count; 2351 u8 count_cts; 2352 u8 count_rts; 2353 u16 flags; 2354 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE]; 2355 }; 2356 2357 /** 2358 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration 2359 * 2360 * Used to configure txpower for station. 2361 * 2362 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames 2363 * to the STA. 2364 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power 2365 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC 2366 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power. 2367 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for 2368 * per peer TPC. 2369 */ 2370 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr { 2371 s16 power; 2372 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type; 2373 }; 2374 2375 /** 2376 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links 2377 * 2378 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the 2379 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change. 2380 * 2381 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. 2382 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. 2383 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply: 2384 * 2385 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the 2386 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes. 2387 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal 2388 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes. 2389 * 2390 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level 2391 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 2392 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2). 2393 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control. 2394 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID 2395 */ 2396 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates { 2397 u16 max_amsdu_len; 2398 2399 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len; 2400 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS]; 2401 }; 2402 2403 /** 2404 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info 2405 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single) 2406 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here. 2407 * 2408 * @sta: reference to owning STA 2409 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr 2410 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different 2411 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr) 2412 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink) 2413 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic) 2414 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates 2415 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2416 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities 2417 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA 2418 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities 2419 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA 2420 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation 2421 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with 2422 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the 2423 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode 2424 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after 2425 * the station moves to associated state. 2426 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration 2427 * 2428 */ 2429 struct ieee80211_link_sta { 2430 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2431 2432 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN]; 2433 u8 link_id; 2434 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode; 2435 2436 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS]; 2437 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap; 2438 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap; 2439 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap; 2440 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa; 2441 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap; 2442 2443 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg; 2444 2445 u8 rx_nss; 2446 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth; 2447 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr; 2448 }; 2449 2450 /** 2451 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry 2452 * 2453 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly 2454 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in 2455 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must 2456 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly, 2457 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a 2458 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it. 2459 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association 2460 * and holds pointers to various link STA's 2461 * 2462 * @addr: MAC address 2463 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP 2464 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU 2465 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us. 2466 * Can be modified by driver. 2467 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does, 2468 * otherwise always false) 2469 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to 2470 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information. 2471 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid 2472 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in 2473 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*. 2474 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported. 2475 * @rates: rate control selection table 2476 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer 2477 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only 2478 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place. 2479 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not. 2480 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station. 2481 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single 2482 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means 2483 * unlimited. 2484 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links 2485 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA 2486 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it. 2487 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not. 2488 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) 2489 * is used for non-data frames 2490 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link 2491 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through 2492 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA 2493 * the first added link STA will point to deflink. 2494 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link, 2495 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and 2496 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO 2497 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to 2498 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address 2499 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned 2500 * by the AP. 2501 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO 2502 * @spp_amsdu: indicates whether the STA uses SPP A-MSDU or not. 2503 */ 2504 struct ieee80211_sta { 2505 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2); 2506 u16 aid; 2507 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 2508 bool wme; 2509 u8 uapsd_queues; 2510 u8 max_sp; 2511 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates; 2512 bool tdls; 2513 bool tdls_initiator; 2514 bool mfp; 2515 bool mlo; 2516 bool spp_amsdu; 2517 u8 max_amsdu_subframes; 2518 2519 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur; 2520 2521 bool support_p2p_ps; 2522 2523 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1]; 2524 2525 u16 valid_links; 2526 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink; 2527 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]; 2528 2529 /* must be last */ 2530 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2531 }; 2532 2533 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP 2534 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 2535 #else 2536 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta) 2537 { 2538 return true; 2539 } 2540 #endif 2541 2542 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \ 2543 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2544 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2545 2546 #define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \ 2547 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \ 2548 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta)) 2549 2550 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \ 2551 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \ 2552 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \ 2553 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \ 2554 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id))) 2555 2556 /** 2557 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command 2558 * 2559 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this 2560 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition. 2561 * 2562 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping 2563 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up 2564 */ 2565 enum sta_notify_cmd { 2566 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE, 2567 }; 2568 2569 /** 2570 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data 2571 * 2572 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and 2573 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU. 2574 */ 2575 struct ieee80211_tx_control { 2576 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2577 }; 2578 2579 /** 2580 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue 2581 * 2582 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 2583 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue 2584 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue), 2585 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled) 2586 * @ac: the AC for this queue 2587 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size 2588 * 2589 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling 2590 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). 2591 */ 2592 struct ieee80211_txq { 2593 struct ieee80211_vif *vif; 2594 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 2595 u8 tid; 2596 u8 ac; 2597 2598 /* must be last */ 2599 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *)); 2600 }; 2601 2602 /** 2603 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags 2604 * 2605 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to 2606 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning 2607 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting 2608 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule, 2609 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully. 2610 * 2611 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL: 2612 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be 2613 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm 2614 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace 2615 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control 2616 * algorithm. 2617 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of 2618 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have 2619 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config 2620 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot 2621 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for 2622 * CCK frames. 2623 * 2624 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS: 2625 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include 2626 * the FCS at the end. 2627 * 2628 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING: 2629 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames 2630 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others 2631 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used 2632 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and 2633 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that 2634 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(). 2635 * 2636 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC: 2637 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We 2638 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal. 2639 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead. 2640 * 2641 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM: 2642 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from 2643 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized 2644 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set. 2645 * 2646 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT: 2647 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h 2648 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC 2649 * 2650 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION: 2651 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation. 2652 * 2653 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS: 2654 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep). 2655 * 2656 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK: 2657 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies 2658 * stack support for dynamic PS. 2659 * 2660 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS: 2661 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS. 2662 * 2663 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE: 2664 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w). 2665 * 2666 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS: 2667 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to 2668 * the stack. 2669 * 2670 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR: 2671 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including 2672 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss. 2673 * 2674 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC: 2675 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e. 2676 * dtim_period). 2677 * 2678 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports 2679 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If 2680 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not 2681 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still 2682 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag 2683 * only in that case. 2684 * 2685 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device 2686 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When 2687 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected 2688 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames. 2689 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure 2690 * the PS mode of connected stations. 2691 * 2692 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session 2693 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in 2694 * software. 2695 * 2696 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of 2697 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only 2698 * active interfaces. 2699 * 2700 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR: The driver would like to be informed 2701 * of any monitor interface, as well as their configured channel. 2702 * This is useful for supporting multiple monitor interfaces on different 2703 * channels. 2704 * 2705 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to 2706 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as 2707 * desired (and thus have them named as desired). 2708 * 2709 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the 2710 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically 2711 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if 2712 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its 2713 * supported cipher suites. 2714 * 2715 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit, 2716 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration 2717 * for frames. 2718 * 2719 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface 2720 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC) 2721 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue 2722 * control for more details. 2723 * 2724 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate 2725 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm. 2726 * 2727 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any 2728 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface 2729 * is supported. 2730 * 2731 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames 2732 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon. 2733 * 2734 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates 2735 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not 2736 * using aggregation for such frames.) 2737 * 2738 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA) 2739 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support 2740 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the 2741 * CSA frame. 2742 * 2743 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload 2744 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first. 2745 * 2746 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands 2747 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band. 2748 * 2749 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth 2750 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel. 2751 * 2752 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs 2753 * within A-MPDU. 2754 * 2755 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status 2756 * for sent beacons. 2757 * 2758 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each 2759 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified 2760 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station 2761 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time. 2762 * 2763 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the 2764 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in 2765 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session 2766 * timeout. 2767 * 2768 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX, 2769 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics. 2770 * 2771 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated 2772 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support. 2773 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must 2774 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting 2775 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta. 2776 * 2777 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list 2778 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU. 2779 * 2780 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event 2781 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such 2782 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver 2783 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout. 2784 * 2785 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself. 2786 * The stack will not do fragmentation. 2787 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well. 2788 * 2789 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on 2790 * TDLS links. 2791 * 2792 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't 2793 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug. 2794 * 2795 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of 2796 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with. 2797 * 2798 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT 2799 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if 2800 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW 2801 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver. 2802 * See also the documentation for that flag. 2803 * 2804 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all 2805 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use 2806 * TXQs to start with. 2807 * 2808 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU 2809 * length in tx status information 2810 * 2811 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2812 * 2813 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID 2814 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set. 2815 * 2816 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only 2817 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx 2818 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID. 2819 * 2820 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation 2821 * offload 2822 * 2823 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation 2824 * offload 2825 * 2826 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx 2827 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface. 2828 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real 2829 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to 2830 * the stack. 2831 * 2832 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color 2833 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software. 2834 * 2835 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting 2836 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that. 2837 * 2838 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING: HW requires disabling puncturing in EHT 2839 * and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 2840 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING_5GHZ: HW requires disabling puncturing in 2841 * EHT in 5 GHz and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead 2842 * 2843 * @IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA: HW/driver handles quieting for CSA, so 2844 * no need to stop queues. This really should be set by a driver that 2845 * implements MLO, so operation can continue on other links when one 2846 * link is switching. 2847 * 2848 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays 2849 */ 2850 enum ieee80211_hw_flags { 2851 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL, 2852 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS, 2853 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING, 2854 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC, 2855 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM, 2856 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC, 2857 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT, 2858 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION, 2859 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS, 2860 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK, 2861 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS, 2862 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE, 2863 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF, 2864 IEEE80211_HW_NO_VIRTUAL_MONITOR, 2865 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF, 2866 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL, 2867 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT, 2868 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS, 2869 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR, 2870 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL, 2871 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK, 2872 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, 2873 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW, 2874 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE, 2875 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF, 2876 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY, 2877 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES, 2878 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA, 2879 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS, 2880 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS, 2881 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW, 2882 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU, 2883 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS, 2884 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR, 2885 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER, 2886 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS, 2887 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU, 2888 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST, 2889 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK, 2890 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG, 2891 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA, 2892 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP, 2893 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ, 2894 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW, 2895 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ, 2896 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN, 2897 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID, 2898 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID, 2899 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT, 2900 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD, 2901 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD, 2902 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP, 2903 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION, 2904 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX, 2905 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING, 2906 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING_5GHZ, 2907 IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA, 2908 2909 /* keep last, obviously */ 2910 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS 2911 }; 2912 2913 /** 2914 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state 2915 * 2916 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware 2917 * information for an 802.11 PHY. 2918 * 2919 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this 2920 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev 2921 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV() 2922 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported 2923 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here. 2924 * 2925 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use. 2926 * 2927 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use 2928 * along with this structure. 2929 * 2930 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags. 2931 * 2932 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb 2933 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.) 2934 * 2935 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb. 2936 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs. 2937 * 2938 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used 2939 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB 2940 * 2941 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval 2942 * that HW supports 2943 * 2944 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for 2945 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these 2946 * queues need to have configurable access parameters. 2947 * 2948 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware. 2949 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be 2950 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw(). 2951 * 2952 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2953 * within &struct ieee80211_vif. 2954 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2955 * within &struct ieee80211_sta. 2956 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2957 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf. 2958 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area 2959 * within @struct ieee80211_txq. 2960 * 2961 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw 2962 * can handle. 2963 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages 2964 * the hw can report back. 2965 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage 2966 * 2967 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of 2968 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver 2969 * aggregation. 2970 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the 2971 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering 2972 * it shouldn't be set. 2973 * 2974 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an 2975 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll 2976 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if 2977 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N 2978 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012). 2979 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used. 2980 * 2981 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum 2982 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list. 2983 * 2984 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX 2985 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set) 2986 * 2987 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW 2988 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't 2989 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only 2990 * adding _BW is supported today. 2991 * 2992 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports, 2993 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH. 2994 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values. 2995 * 2996 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the 2997 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp 2998 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status 2999 * device_timestamp. 3000 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a 3001 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a 3002 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value. 3003 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the 3004 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set. 3005 * 3006 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created 3007 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211, 3008 * other features will be rejected during HW registration. 3009 * 3010 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate 3011 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery- 3012 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap. 3013 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means 3014 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means 3015 * neither enabled. 3016 * 3017 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may 3018 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA. 3019 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values. 3020 * 3021 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the 3022 * device. 3023 * 3024 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from 3025 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed, 3026 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers. 3027 * 3028 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while 3029 * refilling deficit of each TXQ. 3030 * 3031 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set. 3032 * 3033 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware. 3034 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions. 3035 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level. 3036 * 3037 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list. 3038 */ 3039 struct ieee80211_hw { 3040 struct ieee80211_conf conf; 3041 struct wiphy *wiphy; 3042 const char *rate_control_algorithm; 3043 void *priv; 3044 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)]; 3045 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom; 3046 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom; 3047 int vif_data_size; 3048 int sta_data_size; 3049 int chanctx_data_size; 3050 int txq_data_size; 3051 u16 queues; 3052 u16 max_listen_interval; 3053 s8 max_signal; 3054 u8 max_rates; 3055 u8 max_report_rates; 3056 u8 max_rate_tries; 3057 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes; 3058 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes; 3059 u8 max_tx_fragments; 3060 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue; 3061 u8 radiotap_mcs_details; 3062 u16 radiotap_vht_details; 3063 struct { 3064 int units_pos; 3065 s16 accuracy; 3066 } radiotap_timestamp; 3067 netdev_features_t netdev_features; 3068 u8 uapsd_queues; 3069 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len; 3070 u8 max_nan_de_entries; 3071 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift; 3072 u8 weight_multiplier; 3073 u32 max_mtu; 3074 const s8 *tx_power_levels; 3075 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx; 3076 }; 3077 3078 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3079 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3080 { 3081 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3082 } 3083 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3084 3085 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3086 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg) 3087 { 3088 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags); 3089 } 3090 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg) 3091 3092 /** 3093 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request 3094 * 3095 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie) 3096 * @req: cfg80211 request. 3097 */ 3098 struct ieee80211_scan_request { 3099 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies; 3100 3101 /* Keep last */ 3102 struct cfg80211_scan_request req; 3103 }; 3104 3105 /** 3106 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters 3107 * 3108 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from 3109 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request 3110 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode 3111 * @status: channel-switch response status 3112 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received 3113 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3114 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame 3115 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template 3116 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb 3117 */ 3118 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params { 3119 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3120 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef; 3121 u8 action_code; 3122 u32 status; 3123 u32 timestamp; 3124 u16 switch_time; 3125 u16 switch_timeout; 3126 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb; 3127 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie; 3128 }; 3129 3130 /** 3131 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy 3132 * 3133 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query 3134 * 3135 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective 3136 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private 3137 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should 3138 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this 3139 * is already used internally by mac80211. 3140 * 3141 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy. 3142 */ 3143 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy); 3144 3145 /** 3146 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware 3147 * 3148 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for 3149 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 3150 */ 3151 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev) 3152 { 3153 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev); 3154 } 3155 3156 /** 3157 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware 3158 * 3159 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for 3160 * @addr: the address to set 3161 */ 3162 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr) 3163 { 3164 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN); 3165 } 3166 3167 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3168 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3169 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3170 { 3171 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0)) 3172 return NULL; 3173 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx]; 3174 } 3175 3176 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3177 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3178 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c) 3179 { 3180 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0) 3181 return NULL; 3182 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx]; 3183 } 3184 3185 static inline struct ieee80211_rate * 3186 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3187 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx) 3188 { 3189 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0) 3190 return NULL; 3191 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx]; 3192 } 3193 3194 /** 3195 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb 3196 * @hw: the hardware 3197 * @skb: the skb 3198 * 3199 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure 3200 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported. 3201 */ 3202 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 3203 3204 /** 3205 * ieee80211_purge_tx_queue - purge TX skb queue 3206 * @hw: the hardware 3207 * @skbs: the skbs 3208 * 3209 * Free a set of transmit skbs. Use this function when device is going to stop 3210 * but some transmit skbs without TX status are still queued. 3211 * This function does not take the list lock and the caller must hold the 3212 * relevant locks to use it. 3213 */ 3214 void ieee80211_purge_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 3215 struct sk_buff_head *skbs); 3216 3217 /** 3218 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration 3219 * 3220 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware 3221 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations. 3222 * 3223 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given 3224 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and 3225 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL 3226 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to 3227 * the station information for the peer for individual keys. 3228 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when 3229 * VLANs are configured for an access point. 3230 * 3231 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx 3232 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf 3233 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function. 3234 * 3235 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if 3236 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be 3237 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the 3238 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range. 3239 * 3240 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is 3241 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if 3242 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the 3243 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software. 3244 * 3245 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed. 3246 * 3247 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key 3248 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any 3249 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather 3250 * based on the receive flags. 3251 * 3252 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key 3253 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key() 3254 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate 3255 * keys. 3256 * 3257 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption 3258 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key 3259 * handler. 3260 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key. 3261 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The 3262 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did 3263 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is 3264 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this 3265 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16. 3266 * 3267 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index 3268 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required 3269 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses). 3270 * 3271 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag 3272 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following 3273 * requirements: 3274 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211 3275 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed, 3276 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued 3277 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits), 3278 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command 3279 encrypted with the new key when also needing 3280 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and 3281 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted. 3282 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver. 3283 */ 3284 3285 /** 3286 * DOC: Powersave support 3287 * 3288 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations. 3289 * 3290 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself; 3291 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware 3292 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode 3293 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status. 3294 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary, 3295 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required 3296 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when 3297 * it finds traffic directed to it. 3298 * 3299 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in 3300 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused 3301 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking 3302 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it 3303 * back to sleep at appropriate times. 3304 * 3305 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the 3306 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be 3307 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame. 3308 * 3309 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also 3310 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported 3311 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and 3312 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still 3313 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle 3314 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that 3315 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that. 3316 * 3317 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the 3318 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a 3319 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to 3320 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when 3321 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle 3322 * periods. 3323 * 3324 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling 3325 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS 3326 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally, 3327 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the 3328 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support 3329 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the 3330 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value 3331 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable 3332 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS 3333 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave. 3334 * 3335 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling 3336 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the 3337 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS 3338 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To 3339 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames 3340 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled. 3341 * 3342 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with 3343 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK. 3344 */ 3345 3346 /** 3347 * DOC: Beacon filter support 3348 * 3349 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups 3350 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that 3351 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly 3352 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the 3353 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That 3354 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information 3355 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed. 3356 * 3357 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER 3358 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support 3359 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When 3360 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the 3361 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss(). 3362 * 3363 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the 3364 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call 3365 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled 3366 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future. 3367 * 3368 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing 3369 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211 3370 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense 3371 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include 3372 * 3373 * - a list of information element IDs 3374 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element 3375 * 3376 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the 3377 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense 3378 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device 3379 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all 3380 * vendor information elements. 3381 * 3382 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information 3383 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon. 3384 * 3385 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing 3386 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing 3387 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and 3388 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136, 3389 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility 3390 * it could also include some currently unused IDs. 3391 * 3392 * 3393 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the 3394 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming 3395 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of 3396 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when 3397 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above 3398 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be 3399 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement 3400 * them as the roaming algorithm requires. 3401 * 3402 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to 3403 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the 3404 * signal strength threshold checking. 3405 */ 3406 3407 /** 3408 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save 3409 * 3410 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve 3411 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism 3412 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009) 3413 * "11.2.3 SM power save". 3414 * 3415 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames 3416 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct 3417 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the 3418 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware 3419 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by 3420 * hardware flags. 3421 * 3422 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211 3423 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS 3424 * turned off otherwise. 3425 * 3426 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate 3427 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config() 3428 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to 3429 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP. 3430 */ 3431 3432 /** 3433 * DOC: Frame filtering 3434 * 3435 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper 3436 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when 3437 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption, 3438 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is 3439 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible. 3440 * 3441 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell 3442 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be 3443 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out. 3444 * 3445 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast() 3446 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list 3447 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces. 3448 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to 3449 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the 3450 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and 3451 * @total_flags with the new flag states. 3452 * 3453 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will 3454 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count 3455 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted 3456 * or dropped. 3457 * 3458 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared. 3459 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_ 3460 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore 3461 * the flag, but not clear it. 3462 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the 3463 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type 3464 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it). 3465 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware 3466 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes 3467 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them, 3468 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag. 3469 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well. 3470 */ 3471 3472 /** 3473 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients 3474 * 3475 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for 3476 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD. 3477 * There currently is no support for sAPSD. 3478 * 3479 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client 3480 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time. 3481 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but 3482 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies 3483 * the driver code. 3484 * 3485 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete 3486 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set, 3487 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for 3488 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames. 3489 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of 3490 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't 3491 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD. 3492 * 3493 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the 3494 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a 3495 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is, 3496 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is 3497 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this 3498 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to 3499 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will 3500 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The 3501 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its 3502 * @sta_notify callback. 3503 * 3504 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up, 3505 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period. 3506 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and 3507 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When 3508 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211 3509 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames 3510 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit 3511 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER 3512 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only 3513 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to 3514 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have 3515 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS. 3516 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is 3517 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer. 3518 * 3519 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by 3520 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them. 3521 * 3522 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi 3523 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up 3524 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being 3525 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong 3526 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be 3527 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to 3528 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can 3529 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it 3530 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames 3531 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again 3532 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked. 3533 * 3534 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any 3535 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is 3536 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any 3537 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up 3538 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when 3539 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service 3540 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called 3541 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are 3542 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting 3543 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames. 3544 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if 3545 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames 3546 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the 3547 * buffers for those TIDs contain. 3548 * 3549 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may 3550 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must 3551 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that 3552 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid 3553 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released 3554 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp() 3555 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway. 3556 * 3557 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211 3558 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags 3559 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP) 3560 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame. 3561 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case. 3562 * 3563 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data 3564 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as 3565 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame 3566 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed. 3567 */ 3568 3569 /** 3570 * DOC: HW queue control 3571 * 3572 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static 3573 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This 3574 * was problematic for a few reasons: 3575 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames 3576 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly 3577 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames 3578 * 3579 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all 3580 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it 3581 * won't have the same problem with the software queues. 3582 * 3583 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability 3584 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do 3585 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif 3586 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will 3587 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and 3588 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors 3589 * the hardware queue. 3590 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue 3591 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.) 3592 * 3593 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual 3594 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to 3595 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a 3596 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have 3597 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios: 3598 * 3599 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3 3600 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7 3601 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8 3602 * off-channel queue: 9 3603 * 3604 * It would then set up the hardware like this: 3605 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9 3606 * 3607 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows: 3608 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0 3609 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1 3610 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2 3611 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3 3612 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3613 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7. 3614 * 3615 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second 3616 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC. 3617 * 3618 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 3619 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the 3620 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when 3621 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode. 3622 */ 3623 3624 /** 3625 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags 3626 * 3627 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be 3628 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the 3629 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested, 3630 * but this has negative impact on power consumption. 3631 * 3632 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested 3633 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by 3634 * multicast address. 3635 * 3636 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the 3637 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them) 3638 * 3639 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set 3640 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them 3641 * 3642 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate 3643 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses 3644 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing 3645 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should 3646 * honour this flag if possible. 3647 * 3648 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this 3649 * station 3650 * 3651 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes 3652 * 3653 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames 3654 * 3655 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames 3656 * 3657 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames 3658 */ 3659 enum ieee80211_filter_flags { 3660 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1, 3661 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2, 3662 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3, 3663 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4, 3664 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5, 3665 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6, 3666 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7, 3667 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8, 3668 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9, 3669 }; 3670 3671 /** 3672 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions 3673 * 3674 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in 3675 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed. 3676 * 3677 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation 3678 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by 3679 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer 3680 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away! 3681 * 3682 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation 3683 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation 3684 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either 3685 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or 3686 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status 3687 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after 3688 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special 3689 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE. 3690 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational 3691 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting 3692 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the 3693 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(). 3694 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets, 3695 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call 3696 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the 3697 * session is gone and removes the station. 3698 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped 3699 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and 3700 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers 3701 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called. 3702 */ 3703 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action { 3704 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START, 3705 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP, 3706 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START, 3707 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT, 3708 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH, 3709 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT, 3710 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL, 3711 }; 3712 3713 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1 3714 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2 3715 3716 /** 3717 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters 3718 * 3719 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 3720 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session 3721 * @tid: tid of the BA session 3722 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When 3723 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the 3724 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here. 3725 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the 3726 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or 3727 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3728 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU. 3729 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL 3730 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to 3731 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START 3732 */ 3733 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params { 3734 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action; 3735 struct ieee80211_sta *sta; 3736 u16 tid; 3737 u16 ssn; 3738 u16 buf_size; 3739 bool amsdu; 3740 u16 timeout; 3741 }; 3742 3743 /** 3744 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason 3745 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll 3746 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to 3747 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC 3748 */ 3749 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type { 3750 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL, 3751 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD, 3752 }; 3753 3754 /** 3755 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed 3756 * 3757 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit 3758 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station 3759 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40 3760 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes. 3761 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed. 3762 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer 3763 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about 3764 * the peer. 3765 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed 3766 * by the peer 3767 */ 3768 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed { 3769 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0), 3770 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1), 3771 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2), 3772 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3), 3773 }; 3774 3775 /** 3776 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type 3777 * 3778 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations, 3779 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other 3780 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa). 3781 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC 3782 * operations compared to other operations/flows. 3783 * 3784 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC. 3785 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required 3786 * for sending management frames offchannel. 3787 */ 3788 enum ieee80211_roc_type { 3789 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0, 3790 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX, 3791 }; 3792 3793 /** 3794 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type 3795 * 3796 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what 3797 * reconfiguration type was completed. 3798 * 3799 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type 3800 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1) 3801 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless 3802 * of wowlan configuration) 3803 */ 3804 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type { 3805 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART, 3806 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND, 3807 }; 3808 3809 /** 3810 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information 3811 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration, 3812 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3813 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc) 3814 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only 3815 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only 3816 * valid for auth and (re)assoc. 3817 * @was_assoc: set if this call is due to deauth/disassoc 3818 * while just having been associated 3819 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed. 3820 * Only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method. 3821 */ 3822 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info { 3823 u16 duration; 3824 u16 subtype; 3825 u8 success:1, was_assoc:1; 3826 int link_id; 3827 }; 3828 3829 /** 3830 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver 3831 * 3832 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may 3833 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure 3834 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame. 3835 * 3836 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame. 3837 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header. 3838 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on 3839 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should, 3840 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately. 3841 * Must be atomic. 3842 * 3843 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware 3844 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on 3845 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.) 3846 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace, 3847 * or zero. 3848 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address 3849 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device 3850 * is added. 3851 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3852 * 3853 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware 3854 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least 3855 * it must turn off frame reception.) 3856 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects 3857 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue 3858 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback. 3859 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3860 * 3861 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and 3862 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then 3863 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is 3864 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and 3865 * reconfigured at resume time. 3866 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it 3867 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only 3868 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it 3869 * must return 1 from this function. 3870 * 3871 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is 3872 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully 3873 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is 3874 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211 3875 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume. 3876 * 3877 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is 3878 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is 3879 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only 3880 * in suspend(). 3881 * 3882 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is 3883 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start 3884 * and @stop must be implemented. 3885 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before 3886 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the 3887 * interface is given in the conf parameter. 3888 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a 3889 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.) 3890 * Must be implemented and can sleep. 3891 * 3892 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback 3893 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be 3894 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep. 3895 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be 3896 * found by the interface iteration callbacks. 3897 * 3898 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down. 3899 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface 3900 * and no monitor interfaces are present. 3901 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware 3902 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets, 3903 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the 3904 * MAC address of the device going away. 3905 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep. 3906 * 3907 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this 3908 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel. 3909 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code 3910 * if it does. The callback can sleep. 3911 * 3912 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS 3913 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low 3914 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters). 3915 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless 3916 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which 3917 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback 3918 * can sleep. 3919 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed 3920 * are not implemented. 3921 * 3922 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface 3923 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the 3924 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.) 3925 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed. 3926 * The callback can sleep. 3927 * 3928 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link 3929 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an 3930 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information. 3931 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id 3932 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for 3933 * non-MLO connections. 3934 * The callback can sleep. 3935 * 3936 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration. 3937 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed 3938 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic. 3939 * 3940 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter. 3941 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information. 3942 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep. 3943 * 3944 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter. 3945 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames 3946 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination 3947 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates 3948 * which flags are changed. 3949 * This callback can sleep. 3950 * 3951 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit 3952 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic. 3953 * 3954 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3955 * This callback is only called between add_interface and 3956 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface 3957 * is enabled. 3958 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added. 3959 * The callback can sleep. 3960 * 3961 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration" 3962 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers 3963 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY. 3964 * The callback must be atomic. 3965 * 3966 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the 3967 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data 3968 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter. 3969 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify 3970 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(). 3971 * 3972 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for 3973 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP 3974 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it. 3975 * 3976 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start 3977 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel 3978 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's 3979 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure 3980 * that power save is disabled. 3981 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the 3982 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these 3983 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the 3984 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable). 3985 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called; 3986 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to 3987 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code. 3988 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1, 3989 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a 3990 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this 3991 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't 3992 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is. 3993 * The callback can sleep. 3994 * 3995 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan. 3996 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible), 3997 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call 3998 * ieee80211_scan_completed(). 3999 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new 4000 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended. 4001 * The callback can sleep. 4002 * 4003 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at 4004 * specific intervals. The driver must call the 4005 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results. 4006 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called. 4007 * 4008 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan. 4009 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called. 4010 * 4011 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan 4012 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification. 4013 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR, 4014 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it 4015 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep. 4016 * 4017 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a 4018 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need 4019 * this notification. 4020 * The callback can sleep. 4021 * 4022 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics. 4023 * Returns zero if statistics are available. 4024 * The callback can sleep. 4025 * 4026 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does 4027 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the 4028 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware. 4029 * The callback must be atomic. 4030 * 4031 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this 4032 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the 4033 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG 4034 * should be set as well. 4035 * The callback can sleep. 4036 * 4037 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it) 4038 * The callback can sleep. 4039 * 4040 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station, 4041 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep. 4042 * 4043 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated 4044 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback 4045 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected; 4046 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing 4047 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4048 * This callback can sleep. 4049 * 4050 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif 4051 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a 4052 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4053 * 4054 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4055 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within 4056 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep. 4057 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf 4058 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4059 * 4060 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4061 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback 4062 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4063 * callback can sleep. 4064 * 4065 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files 4066 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback 4067 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This 4068 * callback can sleep. 4069 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the 4070 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory. 4071 * 4072 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an 4073 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating 4074 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag 4075 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic. 4076 * 4077 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx 4078 * power for the station. 4079 * This callback can sleep. 4080 * 4081 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a 4082 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.) 4083 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove. 4084 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions 4085 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it 4086 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace 4087 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station. 4088 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed. 4089 * The callback can sleep. 4090 * 4091 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU 4092 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station 4093 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear 4094 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse 4095 * in @sta_state. 4096 * The callback can sleep. 4097 * 4098 * @link_sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can 4099 * be used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits 4100 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected 4101 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver 4102 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since 4103 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly. 4104 * Must be atomic. 4105 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This 4106 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses 4107 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic. 4108 * 4109 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon 4110 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so 4111 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of 4112 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not 4113 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible. 4114 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211. 4115 * The callback can sleep. 4116 * 4117 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max), 4118 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue. 4119 * Returns a negative error code on failure. 4120 * The callback can sleep. 4121 * 4122 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently, 4123 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a 4124 * required function. 4125 * The callback can sleep. 4126 * 4127 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware. 4128 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a 4129 * required function. 4130 * The callback can sleep. 4131 * 4132 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the 4133 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between 4134 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up 4135 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function. 4136 * The callback can sleep. 4137 * 4138 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize 4139 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This 4140 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of 4141 * TSF synchronization. 4142 * The callback can sleep. 4143 * 4144 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us. 4145 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is 4146 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests. 4147 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon. 4148 * The callback can sleep. 4149 * 4150 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information 4151 * 4152 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also 4153 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration, 4154 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback. 4155 * The callback can sleep. 4156 * 4157 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified 4158 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout 4159 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout 4160 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for 4161 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep. 4162 * 4163 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may 4164 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep. 4165 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep. 4166 * 4167 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure 4168 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap 4169 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces 4170 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues. 4171 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped. 4172 * Note that vif can be NULL. 4173 * The callback can sleep. 4174 * 4175 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for 4176 * the given station, as it's about to be removed. 4177 * The callback can sleep. 4178 * 4179 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel 4180 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this 4181 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate 4182 * completion of the channel switch. 4183 * 4184 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device. 4185 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may 4186 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL 4187 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX). 4188 * 4189 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant). 4190 * 4191 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must 4192 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note 4193 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw 4194 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted 4195 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the 4196 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call 4197 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(). 4198 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and 4199 * must be accepted in this case. 4200 * This callback may sleep. 4201 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is 4202 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep. 4203 * 4204 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes. 4205 * 4206 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes. 4207 * 4208 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware 4209 * queues before entering power save. 4210 * 4211 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection 4212 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled. 4213 * The callback can sleep. 4214 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See 4215 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types. 4216 * The callback must be atomic. 4217 * 4218 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given 4219 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for 4220 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver 4221 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD. 4222 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check 4223 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than 4224 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in 4225 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the 4226 * more-data bit must always be set. 4227 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames 4228 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set. 4229 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the 4230 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In 4231 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4232 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll 4233 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple 4234 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame. 4235 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be 4236 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send 4237 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for 4238 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the 4239 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP 4240 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function 4241 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP. 4242 * This callback must be atomic. 4243 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames 4244 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211 4245 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames 4246 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set 4247 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case 4248 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder 4249 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag 4250 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP 4251 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the 4252 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function. 4253 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the 4254 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set. 4255 * This callback must be atomic. 4256 * 4257 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count. 4258 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4259 * expected to return a static value. 4260 * 4261 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats. 4262 * 4263 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats 4264 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets. 4265 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's 4266 * expected to return a static value. 4267 * 4268 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association 4269 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is 4270 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated 4271 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any 4272 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's 4273 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a 4274 * management frame prior to transmitting that frame to allow the driver 4275 * to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response and be 4276 * able to synchronize with the GO. 4277 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return 4278 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away. 4279 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info 4280 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the 4281 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested. 4282 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep. 4283 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously 4284 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data 4285 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used. 4286 * 4287 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending 4288 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's 4289 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS 4290 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP. 4291 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS 4292 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least 4293 * 2 * (DTIM period). 4294 * The callback is optional and can sleep. 4295 * 4296 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation. 4297 * This callback may sleep. 4298 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction. 4299 * This callback may sleep. 4300 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that 4301 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same 4302 * channel context with different settings 4303 * This callback may sleep. 4304 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound 4305 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping. 4306 * This callback may sleep. 4307 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being 4308 * unbound from vif. 4309 * This callback may sleep. 4310 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to 4311 * another, as specified in the list of 4312 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according 4313 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode. 4314 * This callback may sleep. 4315 * 4316 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the 4317 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel 4318 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses 4319 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is 4320 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being 4321 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed. 4322 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface. 4323 * 4324 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and 4325 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed. 4326 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and 4327 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames). 4328 * This callback may sleep. 4329 * 4330 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed. 4331 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces. 4332 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep. 4333 * 4334 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel. 4335 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this 4336 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be 4337 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call 4338 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get() 4339 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is 4340 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been 4341 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish(). 4342 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called, 4343 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway. 4344 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4345 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA 4346 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing 4347 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch. 4348 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4349 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the 4350 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4351 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called 4352 * when channel switch procedure was aborted, allowing the 4353 * driver to go back to a normal configuration. 4354 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called 4355 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with 4356 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count. 4357 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all 4358 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A 4359 * channel context is bound before this is called. 4360 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again. 4361 * 4362 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the 4363 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0 4364 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide. 4365 * 4366 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration 4367 * and hardware limits. 4368 * 4369 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver 4370 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations 4371 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The 4372 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of 4373 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation. 4374 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can 4375 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use. 4376 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both 4377 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes. 4378 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or 4379 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets 4380 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue 4381 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch 4382 * response template is provided, together with the location of the 4383 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within 4384 * the function call. 4385 * 4386 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue. 4387 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a 4388 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues 4389 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action 4390 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet. 4391 * 4392 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one. 4393 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster. 4394 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf 4395 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters 4396 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config. 4397 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since 4398 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the 4399 * changed parameters. 4400 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in 4401 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of 4402 * this call. 4403 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call 4404 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with 4405 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal. 4406 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports 4407 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation 4408 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while 4409 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU. 4410 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available. 4411 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided. 4412 * 4413 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep) 4414 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep) 4415 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep. 4416 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer. 4417 * This callback may sleep. 4418 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags 4419 * This callback may sleep. 4420 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using 4421 * 4-address mode 4422 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings. 4423 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed 4424 * to use rx decapsulation offload 4425 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer. 4426 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters 4427 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement. 4428 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of 4429 * twt structure. 4430 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received 4431 * from the peer. 4432 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for 4433 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit 4434 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev. 4435 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime 4436 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected 4437 * radar channel. 4438 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to 4439 * disable background CAC/radar detection. 4440 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to 4441 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading 4442 * @can_activate_links: Checks if a specific active_links bitmap is 4443 * supported by the driver. 4444 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while 4445 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer), 4446 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or 4447 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation. 4448 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures 4449 * that were already removed, in case they're needed. 4450 * This callback can sleep. 4451 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to 4452 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep. 4453 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links, 4454 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero. 4455 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them. 4456 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is 4457 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of 4458 * that. 4459 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware 4460 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif. 4461 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid 4462 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown. 4463 * @can_neg_ttlm: for managed interface, requests the driver to determine 4464 * if the requested TID-To-Link mapping can be accepted or not. 4465 * If it's not accepted the driver may suggest a preferred mapping and 4466 * modify @ttlm parameter with the suggested TID-to-Link mapping. 4467 * @prep_add_interface: prepare for interface addition. This can be used by 4468 * drivers to prepare for the addition of a new interface, e.g., allocate 4469 * the needed resources etc. This callback doesn't guarantee that an 4470 * interface with the specified type would be added, and thus drivers that 4471 * implement this callback need to handle such cases. The type is the full 4472 * &enum nl80211_iftype. 4473 */ 4474 struct ieee80211_ops { 4475 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4476 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control, 4477 struct sk_buff *skb); 4478 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4479 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool suspend); 4480 #ifdef CONFIG_PM 4481 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan); 4482 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4483 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled); 4484 #endif 4485 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4486 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4487 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4488 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4489 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p); 4490 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4491 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4492 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed); 4493 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4494 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4495 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4496 u64 changed); 4497 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4498 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4499 u64 changed); 4500 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4501 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4502 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info, 4503 u64 changed); 4504 4505 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4506 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4507 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4508 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4509 4510 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4511 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list); 4512 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4513 unsigned int changed_flags, 4514 unsigned int *total_flags, 4515 u64 multicast); 4516 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4517 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4518 unsigned int filter_flags, 4519 unsigned int changed_flags); 4520 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4521 bool set); 4522 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd, 4523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4524 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key); 4525 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4526 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4527 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf, 4528 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4529 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key); 4530 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4531 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4532 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data); 4533 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4534 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx); 4535 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4536 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req); 4537 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4538 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4539 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4540 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4541 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req, 4542 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies); 4543 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4544 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4545 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4546 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4547 const u8 *mac_addr); 4548 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4549 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4550 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4551 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats); 4552 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4553 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 4554 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 4555 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4556 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value); 4557 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4558 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4559 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4560 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4561 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS 4562 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4563 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4564 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4565 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4566 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4567 struct dentry *dir); 4568 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4569 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4570 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4571 struct dentry *dir); 4572 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4573 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4574 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4575 struct dentry *dir); 4576 #endif 4577 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4578 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4579 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4580 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4581 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4582 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4583 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4584 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state, 4585 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state); 4586 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4587 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4588 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4589 void (*link_sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4590 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4591 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta, 4592 u32 changed); 4593 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4594 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4595 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4596 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4597 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4598 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4599 struct station_info *sinfo); 4600 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4601 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4602 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac, 4603 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params); 4604 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4605 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4606 u64 tsf); 4607 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4608 s64 offset); 4609 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4610 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4611 4612 /** 4613 * @ampdu_action: 4614 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action. 4615 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want 4616 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through 4617 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. 4618 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver 4619 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size 4620 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the 4621 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be 4622 * possible with a buf_size of 8: 4623 * 4624 * - ``TX: 1.....7`` 4625 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1) 4626 * - ``TX: 8..1...`` 4627 * 4628 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the 4629 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be: 4630 * 4631 * - ``TX: 1 or`` 4632 * - ``TX: 18 or`` 4633 * - ``TX: 81`` 4634 * 4635 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again. 4636 * 4637 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return 4638 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START 4639 * if the session can start immediately. 4640 * 4641 * The callback can sleep. 4642 */ 4643 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4644 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4645 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params); 4646 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx, 4647 struct survey_info *survey); 4648 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4649 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class); 4650 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE 4651 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4652 void *data, int len); 4653 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb, 4654 struct netlink_callback *cb, 4655 void *data, int len); 4656 #endif 4657 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4658 u32 queues, bool drop); 4659 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4660 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4661 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4662 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4663 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4664 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant); 4665 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant); 4666 4667 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4668 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4669 struct ieee80211_channel *chan, 4670 int duration, 4671 enum ieee80211_roc_type type); 4672 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4673 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4674 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx); 4675 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4676 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max); 4677 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4678 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4679 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask); 4680 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4681 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4682 const struct ieee80211_event *event); 4683 4684 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4685 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4686 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4687 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4688 bool more_data); 4689 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4690 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4691 u16 tids, int num_frames, 4692 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason, 4693 bool more_data); 4694 4695 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4696 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset); 4697 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4698 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4699 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data); 4700 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4701 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4702 u32 sset, u8 *data); 4703 4704 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4705 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4706 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4707 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4708 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4709 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info); 4710 4711 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4712 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4713 unsigned int link_id); 4714 4715 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4716 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4717 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4718 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4719 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4720 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 4721 u32 changed); 4722 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4723 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4724 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4725 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4726 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4727 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4728 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf, 4729 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 4730 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4731 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 4732 int n_vifs, 4733 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 4734 4735 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4736 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type); 4737 4738 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6) 4739 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4740 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4741 struct inet6_dev *idev); 4742 #endif 4743 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4744 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4745 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4746 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4747 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4748 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4749 4750 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4751 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4752 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4753 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4754 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4755 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf); 4756 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4757 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4758 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch); 4759 4760 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4761 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4762 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4763 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4764 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4765 int *dbm); 4766 4767 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4768 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4769 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class, 4770 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 4771 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie); 4772 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4773 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4774 struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 4775 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4776 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4777 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params); 4778 4779 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4780 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 4781 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4782 4783 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4784 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4785 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf); 4786 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4787 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4788 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4789 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4790 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes); 4791 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4792 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4793 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func); 4794 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4795 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4796 u8 instance_id); 4797 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4798 struct sk_buff *head, 4799 struct sk_buff *skb); 4800 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4801 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4802 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats); 4803 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4804 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4805 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4806 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request); 4807 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4809 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4810 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf); 4811 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4812 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4813 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids); 4814 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4815 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 4816 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4817 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4818 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4819 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar); 4820 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4821 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4822 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled); 4823 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4824 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4825 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt); 4826 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4827 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid); 4828 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4829 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef); 4830 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4832 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4833 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx, 4834 struct net_device_path *path); 4835 bool (*can_activate_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4836 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4837 u16 active_links); 4838 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4839 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4840 u16 old_links, u16 new_links, 4841 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]); 4842 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4843 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4844 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 4845 u16 old_links, u16 new_links); 4846 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4847 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4848 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts); 4849 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4850 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4851 struct net_device *dev, 4852 enum tc_setup_type type, 4853 void *type_data); 4854 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res 4855 (*can_neg_ttlm)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 4856 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm *ttlm); 4857 void (*prep_add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4858 enum nl80211_iftype type); 4859 }; 4860 4861 /** 4862 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device 4863 * 4864 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4865 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4866 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4867 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4868 * @priv_data_len. 4869 * 4870 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4871 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4872 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device. 4873 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d) 4874 * 4875 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4876 */ 4877 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len, 4878 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops, 4879 const char *requested_name); 4880 4881 /** 4882 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device 4883 * 4884 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer 4885 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions. 4886 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by 4887 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as 4888 * @priv_data_len. 4889 * 4890 * @priv_data_len: length of private data 4891 * @ops: callbacks for this device 4892 * 4893 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error. 4894 */ 4895 static inline 4896 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len, 4897 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops) 4898 { 4899 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL); 4900 } 4901 4902 /** 4903 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device 4904 * 4905 * You must call this function before any other functions in 4906 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you 4907 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information. 4908 * 4909 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw() 4910 * 4911 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 4912 */ 4913 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4914 4915 /** 4916 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description 4917 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec 4918 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds 4919 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period) 4920 */ 4921 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink { 4922 int throughput; 4923 int blink_time; 4924 }; 4925 4926 /** 4927 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags 4928 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio 4929 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working 4930 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one 4931 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP 4932 */ 4933 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags { 4934 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0), 4935 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1), 4936 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2), 4937 }; 4938 4939 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4940 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4941 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4942 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4943 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 4944 const char * 4945 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 4946 unsigned int flags, 4947 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 4948 unsigned int blink_table_len); 4949 #endif 4950 /** 4951 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED 4952 * 4953 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4954 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4955 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4956 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4957 * 4958 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4959 * 4960 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4961 */ 4962 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4963 { 4964 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4965 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw); 4966 #else 4967 return NULL; 4968 #endif 4969 } 4970 4971 /** 4972 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED 4973 * 4974 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4975 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4976 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4977 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4978 * 4979 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 4980 * 4981 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 4982 */ 4983 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 4984 { 4985 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 4986 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw); 4987 #else 4988 return NULL; 4989 #endif 4990 } 4991 4992 /** 4993 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED 4994 * 4995 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware 4996 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 4997 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 4998 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 4999 * 5000 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5001 * 5002 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5003 */ 5004 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5005 { 5006 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5007 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw); 5008 #else 5009 return NULL; 5010 #endif 5011 } 5012 5013 /** 5014 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED 5015 * 5016 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware 5017 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device. 5018 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs) 5019 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device. 5020 * 5021 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for 5022 * 5023 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs. 5024 */ 5025 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw) 5026 { 5027 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5028 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw); 5029 #else 5030 return NULL; 5031 #endif 5032 } 5033 5034 /** 5035 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger 5036 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for 5037 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags 5038 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput 5039 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table 5040 * 5041 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are 5042 * configured) or the name of the new trigger. 5043 * 5044 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw(). 5045 */ 5046 static inline const char * 5047 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags, 5048 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table, 5049 unsigned int blink_table_len) 5050 { 5051 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS 5052 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table, 5053 blink_table_len); 5054 #else 5055 return NULL; 5056 #endif 5057 } 5058 5059 /** 5060 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device 5061 * 5062 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources 5063 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem. 5064 * 5065 * @hw: the hardware to unregister 5066 */ 5067 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5068 5069 /** 5070 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor 5071 * 5072 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the 5073 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw() 5074 * before calling this function. 5075 * 5076 * @hw: the hardware to free 5077 */ 5078 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5079 5080 /** 5081 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely 5082 * 5083 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason 5084 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state 5085 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware 5086 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by 5087 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all 5088 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function. 5089 * 5090 * @hw: the hardware to restart 5091 */ 5092 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 5093 5094 /** 5095 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list 5096 * 5097 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5098 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5099 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5100 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5101 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5102 * 5103 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5104 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5105 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5106 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5107 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5108 * 5109 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock 5110 * 5111 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5112 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5113 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5114 * @list: the destination list 5115 */ 5116 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5117 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list); 5118 5119 /** 5120 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context 5121 * 5122 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5123 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5124 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5125 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5126 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5127 * 5128 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5129 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5130 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5131 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5132 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5133 * 5134 * This function must be called with BHs disabled. 5135 * 5136 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5137 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL 5138 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5139 * @napi: the NAPI context 5140 */ 5141 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5142 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi); 5143 5144 /** 5145 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame 5146 * 5147 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive 5148 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a 5149 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211 5150 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory 5151 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack. 5152 * 5153 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5154 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to 5155 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be 5156 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5157 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5158 * 5159 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5160 * 5161 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5162 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5163 */ 5164 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb) 5165 { 5166 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL); 5167 } 5168 5169 /** 5170 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame 5171 * 5172 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context 5173 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5174 * 5175 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not 5176 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with 5177 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5178 * 5179 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5180 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5181 */ 5182 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb); 5183 5184 /** 5185 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context) 5186 * 5187 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context 5188 * (internally disables bottom halves). 5189 * 5190 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may 5191 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5192 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni(). 5193 * 5194 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on 5195 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call 5196 */ 5197 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5198 struct sk_buff *skb) 5199 { 5200 local_bh_disable(); 5201 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb); 5202 local_bh_enable(); 5203 } 5204 5205 /** 5206 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta 5207 * 5208 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS 5209 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station 5210 * entering/leaving PS mode. 5211 * 5212 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled. 5213 * 5214 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against 5215 * each other. 5216 * 5217 * @sta: currently connected sta 5218 * @start: start or stop PS 5219 * 5220 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set. 5221 */ 5222 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start); 5223 5224 /** 5225 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta 5226 * (in process context) 5227 * 5228 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context 5229 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still 5230 * applies. 5231 * 5232 * @sta: currently connected sta 5233 * @start: start or stop PS 5234 * 5235 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(). 5236 */ 5237 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5238 bool start) 5239 { 5240 int ret; 5241 5242 local_bh_disable(); 5243 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start); 5244 local_bh_enable(); 5245 5246 return ret; 5247 } 5248 5249 /** 5250 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received 5251 * @sta: currently connected station 5252 * 5253 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5254 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a 5255 * connected station was received. 5256 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5257 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must 5258 * be serialized. 5259 */ 5260 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta); 5261 5262 /** 5263 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received 5264 * @sta: currently connected station 5265 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame 5266 * 5267 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set, 5268 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame 5269 * from a connected station was received. 5270 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() 5271 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be 5272 * serialized. 5273 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown. 5274 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC 5275 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper 5276 * checks. 5277 */ 5278 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 5279 5280 /* 5281 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions. 5282 * This is enough for the radiotap header. 5283 */ 5284 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4) 5285 5286 /** 5287 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames 5288 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station 5289 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames 5290 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID 5291 * 5292 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing 5293 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need 5294 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit. 5295 * 5296 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are 5297 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data 5298 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim 5299 * call! Beware of the locking!) 5300 * 5301 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD) 5302 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are 5303 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes 5304 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data, 5305 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered 5306 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP). 5307 * 5308 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per 5309 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since 5310 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the 5311 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that 5312 * use this API. 5313 */ 5314 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5315 u8 tid, bool buffered); 5316 5317 /** 5318 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet 5319 * 5320 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support 5321 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent 5322 * rate selection table for the station entry. 5323 * 5324 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5325 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent. 5326 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 5327 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information 5328 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch 5329 */ 5330 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5331 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5332 struct sk_buff *skb, 5333 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest, 5334 int max_rates); 5335 5336 /** 5337 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station 5338 * 5339 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput 5340 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can 5341 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station 5342 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic 5343 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause 5344 * slow stations to starve). 5345 * 5346 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for. 5347 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps. 5348 */ 5349 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5350 u32 thr); 5351 5352 /** 5353 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback 5354 * 5355 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta 5356 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision 5357 * in updating the tx rate in data path. 5358 * 5359 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5360 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for. 5361 * @info: tx status information 5362 */ 5363 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5364 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 5365 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info); 5366 5367 /** 5368 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback 5369 * 5370 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been 5371 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for 5372 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics. 5373 * 5374 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function 5375 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls 5376 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() 5377 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with 5378 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni(). 5379 * 5380 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5381 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5382 */ 5383 void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5384 struct sk_buff *skb); 5385 5386 /** 5387 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback 5388 * 5389 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5390 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not 5391 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info. 5392 * 5393 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5394 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5395 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5396 * 5397 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5398 * @status: tx status information 5399 */ 5400 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5401 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status); 5402 5403 /** 5404 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb 5405 * 5406 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb() 5407 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to 5408 * specific skbs. 5409 * 5410 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized 5411 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() 5412 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5413 * 5414 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5415 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent 5416 * (NULL for multicast packets) 5417 * @info: tx status information 5418 */ 5419 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5420 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 5421 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info) 5422 { 5423 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = { 5424 .sta = sta, 5425 .info = info, 5426 }; 5427 5428 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status); 5429 } 5430 5431 /** 5432 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context) 5433 * 5434 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context. 5435 * 5436 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5437 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed 5438 * for a single hardware. 5439 * 5440 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5441 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5442 */ 5443 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5444 struct sk_buff *skb) 5445 { 5446 local_bh_disable(); 5447 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb); 5448 local_bh_enable(); 5449 } 5450 5451 /** 5452 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback 5453 * 5454 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context 5455 * (internally defers to a tasklet.) 5456 * 5457 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and 5458 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware. 5459 * 5460 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by 5461 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call 5462 */ 5463 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5464 struct sk_buff *skb); 5465 5466 /** 5467 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station 5468 * 5469 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding 5470 * connected STA. 5471 * 5472 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta 5473 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response 5474 */ 5475 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets); 5476 5477 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2 5478 5479 /** 5480 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets 5481 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element 5482 * @tim_length: size of TIM element 5483 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets 5484 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which 5485 * should be ignored. 5486 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element 5487 */ 5488 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets { 5489 u16 tim_offset; 5490 u16 tim_length; 5491 5492 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM]; 5493 u16 mbssid_off; 5494 }; 5495 5496 /** 5497 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function 5498 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5499 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5500 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5501 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5502 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5503 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5504 * 5505 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5506 * obtain the beacon template. 5507 * 5508 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the 5509 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template 5510 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when 5511 * applicable, the CSA count. 5512 * 5513 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5514 * 5515 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5516 */ 5517 struct sk_buff * 5518 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5520 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5521 unsigned int link_id); 5522 5523 /** 5524 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation 5525 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5526 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5527 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5528 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5529 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP). 5530 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set. 5531 * 5532 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5533 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the 5534 * requested index. 5535 * 5536 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates. 5537 */ 5538 struct sk_buff * 5539 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5540 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5541 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs, 5542 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index); 5543 5544 /** 5545 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons 5546 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons. 5547 * 5548 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons. 5549 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon 5550 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will 5551 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver. 5552 */ 5553 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons { 5554 u8 cnt; 5555 struct { 5556 struct sk_buff *skb; 5557 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs; 5558 } bcn[]; 5559 }; 5560 5561 /** 5562 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation 5563 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5564 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5565 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP) 5566 * 5567 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template() 5568 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required 5569 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only 5570 * one multiple BSSID element. 5571 * 5572 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory. 5573 * 5574 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *. 5575 * %NULL on error. 5576 */ 5577 struct ieee80211_ema_beacons * 5578 ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5579 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5580 unsigned int link_id); 5581 5582 /** 5583 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list 5584 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers. 5585 * 5586 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling 5587 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list() 5588 */ 5589 void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons); 5590 5591 /** 5592 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function 5593 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5594 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5595 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset. 5596 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5597 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length, 5598 * (including the ID and length bytes!). 5599 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes). 5600 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5601 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5602 * 5603 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to 5604 * obtain the beacon frame. 5605 * 5606 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5607 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon 5608 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly 5609 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt). 5610 * 5611 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 5612 * 5613 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error. 5614 */ 5615 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5616 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5617 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length, 5618 unsigned int link_id); 5619 5620 /** 5621 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function 5622 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5623 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5624 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA 5625 * that is not associated with AP MLD). 5626 * 5627 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5628 * 5629 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(). 5630 */ 5631 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5632 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5633 unsigned int link_id) 5634 { 5635 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id); 5636 } 5637 5638 /** 5639 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown 5640 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5641 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5642 * 5643 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission. 5644 * This function is called implicitly when 5645 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the 5646 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this 5647 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown. 5648 * 5649 * Return: new countdown value 5650 */ 5651 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5652 unsigned int link_id); 5653 5654 /** 5655 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown 5656 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5657 * @counter: the new value for the counter 5658 * 5659 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be 5660 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211. 5661 * 5662 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(), 5663 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value. 5664 */ 5665 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter); 5666 5667 /** 5668 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch 5669 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5670 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5671 * 5672 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5673 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5674 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed. 5675 */ 5676 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id); 5677 5678 /** 5679 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1 5680 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5681 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5682 * 5683 * Return: %true if the countdown reached 1, %false otherwise 5684 */ 5685 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5686 unsigned int link_id); 5687 5688 /** 5689 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change 5690 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5691 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 5692 * 5693 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this 5694 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to 5695 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed 5696 */ 5697 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 link_id); 5698 5699 /** 5700 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template 5701 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5702 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5703 * 5704 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5705 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller. 5706 * 5707 * Can only be called in AP mode. 5708 * 5709 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error. 5710 */ 5711 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5712 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5713 5714 /** 5715 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template 5716 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5717 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5718 * 5719 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to 5720 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5721 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used. 5722 * 5723 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5724 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit. 5725 * 5726 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error. 5727 */ 5728 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5729 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5730 5731 /** 5732 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template 5733 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5734 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5735 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses 5736 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with 5737 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be. 5738 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set 5739 * if at all possible 5740 * 5741 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to 5742 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct 5743 * BSSID and address is used. 5744 * 5745 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the 5746 * returned packet will be QoS NDP. 5747 * 5748 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the 5749 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields. 5750 * 5751 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error. 5752 */ 5753 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5754 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5755 int link_id, bool qos_ok); 5756 5757 /** 5758 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 5759 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5760 * @src_addr: source MAC address 5761 * @ssid: SSID buffer 5762 * @ssid_len: length of SSID 5763 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs 5764 * 5765 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 5766 * hardware. 5767 * 5768 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 5769 */ 5770 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5771 const u8 *src_addr, 5772 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len, 5773 size_t tailroom); 5774 5775 /** 5776 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function 5777 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5778 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5779 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5780 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5781 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5782 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame. 5783 * 5784 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5785 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5786 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5787 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed. 5788 */ 5789 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5790 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5791 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5792 struct ieee80211_rts *rts); 5793 5794 /** 5795 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame 5796 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5797 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5798 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS. 5799 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5800 * 5801 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5802 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5803 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5804 * 5805 * Return: The duration. 5806 */ 5807 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len, 5809 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5810 5811 /** 5812 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function 5813 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5814 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5815 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5816 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets). 5817 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5818 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame. 5819 * 5820 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in 5821 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5822 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible 5823 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed. 5824 */ 5825 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5826 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5827 const void *frame, size_t frame_len, 5828 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl, 5829 struct ieee80211_cts *cts); 5830 5831 /** 5832 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame 5833 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5834 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5835 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self. 5836 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 5837 * 5838 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide 5839 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive 5840 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder. 5841 * 5842 * Return: The duration. 5843 */ 5844 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5846 size_t frame_len, 5847 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl); 5848 5849 /** 5850 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame 5851 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5852 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5853 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on 5854 * @frame_len: the length of the frame. 5855 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted. 5856 * 5857 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its 5858 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps). 5859 * 5860 * Return: The duration. 5861 */ 5862 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 5863 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 5864 enum nl80211_band band, 5865 size_t frame_len, 5866 struct ieee80211_rate *rate); 5867 5868 /** 5869 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames 5870 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 5871 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 5872 * 5873 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If 5874 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast 5875 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host 5876 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered 5877 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame. 5878 * 5879 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered 5880 * frames are available. 5881 * 5882 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was 5883 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus 5884 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns 5885 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver 5886 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to 5887 * use common code for all beacons. 5888 */ 5889 struct sk_buff * 5890 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 5891 5892 /** 5893 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32 5894 * 5895 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32. 5896 * 5897 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5898 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5899 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5900 */ 5901 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5902 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5903 5904 /** 5905 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key 5906 * 5907 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken 5908 * from the given packet. 5909 * 5910 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5911 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted 5912 * with this P1K 5913 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5914 */ 5915 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5916 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k) 5917 { 5918 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data; 5919 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control); 5920 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]); 5921 5922 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k); 5923 } 5924 5925 /** 5926 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX 5927 * 5928 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32 5929 * and transmitter address. 5930 * 5931 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5932 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key 5933 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for 5934 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values 5935 */ 5936 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5937 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k); 5938 5939 /** 5940 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key 5941 * 5942 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values 5943 * in the packet. 5944 * 5945 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5946 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be 5947 * encrypted with this key 5948 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes 5949 */ 5950 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5951 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k); 5952 5953 /** 5954 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos 5955 * 5956 * @pos: start of crypto header 5957 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5958 * @pn: PN to add 5959 * 5960 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of 5961 * the packet payload) 5962 * 5963 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should 5964 * point to the crypto header) 5965 */ 5966 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn); 5967 5968 /** 5969 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter 5970 * 5971 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5972 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5973 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5974 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5975 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data 5976 * 5977 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs 5978 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done 5979 * by the device and not by mac80211. 5980 * 5981 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 5982 * can be done concurrently. 5983 */ 5984 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 5985 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 5986 5987 /** 5988 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter 5989 * 5990 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 5991 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only); 5992 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For 5993 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid. 5994 * @seq: new sequence data 5995 * 5996 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the 5997 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK 5998 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called 5999 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211. 6000 * 6001 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing 6002 * can be done concurrently. 6003 */ 6004 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6005 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq); 6006 6007 /** 6008 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key 6009 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key 6010 * 6011 * Context: Must be called with the wiphy mutex held. 6012 * 6013 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the 6014 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but 6015 * instead assumed to have been removed already. 6016 */ 6017 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6018 6019 /** 6020 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN 6021 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on 6022 * @keyconf: new key data 6023 * @link_id: the link id of the key or -1 for non-MLO 6024 * 6025 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new 6026 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper 6027 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them. 6028 * 6029 * Return: the newly allocated key structure, which will have 6030 * similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to 6031 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an 6032 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc. 6033 * 6034 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware 6035 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK 6036 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver 6037 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses 6038 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part 6039 * of the reconfiguration. 6040 * 6041 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq() 6042 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly. 6043 * 6044 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware, 6045 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases 6046 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for 6047 * the key that's being replaced. 6048 */ 6049 struct ieee80211_key_conf * 6050 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6051 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, 6052 int link_id); 6053 6054 /** 6055 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying 6056 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on 6057 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association 6058 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying 6059 * @gfp: allocation flags 6060 */ 6061 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid, 6062 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp); 6063 6064 /** 6065 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key 6066 * 6067 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6068 * at the same time. 6069 * 6070 * @keyconf: the key in question 6071 */ 6072 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6073 6074 /** 6075 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key 6076 * 6077 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called 6078 * at the same time. 6079 * 6080 * @keyconf: the key in question 6081 */ 6082 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf); 6083 6084 /** 6085 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue 6086 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6087 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6088 * 6089 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue. 6090 */ 6091 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6092 6093 /** 6094 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue 6095 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6096 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6097 * 6098 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue. 6099 */ 6100 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6101 6102 /** 6103 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue 6104 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6105 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero). 6106 * 6107 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped. 6108 * 6109 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise. 6110 */ 6111 6112 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue); 6113 6114 /** 6115 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues 6116 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6117 * 6118 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues. 6119 */ 6120 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6121 6122 /** 6123 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues 6124 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6125 * 6126 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues. 6127 */ 6128 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6129 6130 /** 6131 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan 6132 * 6133 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is 6134 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify 6135 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from 6136 * any context, including hardirq context. 6137 * 6138 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan 6139 * @info: information about the completed scan 6140 */ 6141 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6142 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info); 6143 6144 /** 6145 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan 6146 * 6147 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the 6148 * driver whenever there are new scan results available. 6149 * 6150 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6151 */ 6152 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6153 6154 /** 6155 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped 6156 * 6157 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by 6158 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task. 6159 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan 6160 * while associating, for instance. 6161 * 6162 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans 6163 */ 6164 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6165 6166 /** 6167 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags 6168 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have 6169 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware 6170 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new 6171 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they 6172 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6173 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all 6174 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet. 6175 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up). 6176 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA 6177 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery 6178 * for instance. 6179 */ 6180 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags { 6181 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0, 6182 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0), 6183 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1), 6184 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2), 6185 }; 6186 6187 /** 6188 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces 6189 * 6190 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6191 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as 6192 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep. 6193 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6194 * 6195 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6196 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6197 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6198 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6199 */ 6200 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6201 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6202 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6203 void *data); 6204 6205 /** 6206 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces 6207 * 6208 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6209 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6210 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator 6211 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can 6212 * be used. 6213 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6214 * 6215 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6216 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6217 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6218 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6219 */ 6220 static inline void 6221 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags, 6222 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac, 6223 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6224 void *data) 6225 { 6226 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw, 6227 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE, 6228 iterator, data); 6229 } 6230 6231 /** 6232 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces 6233 * 6234 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6235 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6236 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6237 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead. 6238 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface(). 6239 * 6240 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6241 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6242 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6243 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6244 */ 6245 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6246 u32 iter_flags, 6247 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6248 u8 *mac, 6249 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6250 void *data); 6251 6252 /** 6253 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces 6254 * 6255 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given 6256 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them. 6257 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex. 6258 * 6259 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6260 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags 6261 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6262 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6263 */ 6264 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6265 u32 iter_flags, 6266 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6267 u8 *mac, 6268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif), 6269 void *data); 6270 6271 /** 6272 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations 6273 * 6274 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6275 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6276 * function for them. 6277 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic, 6278 * 6279 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6280 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep 6281 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6282 */ 6283 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6284 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6285 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6286 void *data); 6287 6288 /** 6289 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx - iterate stations 6290 * 6291 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given 6292 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback 6293 * function for them. This version can only be used while holding the wiphy 6294 * mutex. 6295 * 6296 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over 6297 * @iterator: the iterator function to call 6298 * @data: first argument of the iterator function 6299 */ 6300 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6301 void (*iterator)(void *data, 6302 struct ieee80211_sta *sta), 6303 void *data); 6304 6305 /** 6306 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6307 * 6308 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue. 6309 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be. 6310 * 6311 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6312 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue 6313 */ 6314 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work); 6315 6316 /** 6317 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue 6318 * 6319 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211 6320 * workqueue. 6321 * 6322 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for 6323 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue 6324 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing 6325 */ 6326 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6327 struct delayed_work *dwork, 6328 unsigned long delay); 6329 6330 /** 6331 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer. 6332 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6333 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6334 * 6335 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer 6336 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the 6337 * mac80211. 6338 * 6339 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section. 6340 */ 6341 void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6342 u16 tid); 6343 6344 /** 6345 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session. 6346 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session 6347 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6348 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs) 6349 * 6350 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise 6351 * 6352 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6353 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6354 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6355 */ 6356 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, 6357 u16 timeout); 6358 6359 /** 6360 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate. 6361 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6362 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6363 * @tid: the TID to BA on. 6364 * 6365 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6366 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called 6367 * from any context. 6368 */ 6369 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6370 u16 tid); 6371 6372 /** 6373 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session. 6374 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop 6375 * @tid: the TID to stop BA. 6376 * 6377 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active 6378 * 6379 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate 6380 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level 6381 * will be managed by the mac80211. 6382 */ 6383 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid); 6384 6385 /** 6386 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate. 6387 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6388 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient. 6389 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on. 6390 * 6391 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has 6392 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It 6393 * can be called from any context. 6394 */ 6395 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra, 6396 u16 tid); 6397 6398 /** 6399 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station 6400 * 6401 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on 6402 * @addr: station's address 6403 * 6404 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6405 * 6406 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6407 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6408 */ 6409 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6410 const u8 *addr); 6411 6412 /** 6413 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware 6414 * 6415 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6416 * @addr: remote station's address 6417 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'. 6418 * 6419 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise. 6420 * 6421 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the 6422 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well. 6423 * 6424 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get 6425 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'. 6426 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple 6427 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another 6428 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first). 6429 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL 6430 * is not reliable. 6431 * 6432 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible. 6433 */ 6434 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6435 const u8 *addr, 6436 const u8 *localaddr); 6437 6438 /** 6439 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses 6440 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6441 * @addr: remote station's link address 6442 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that) 6443 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found, 6444 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed 6445 * 6446 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection. 6447 * 6448 * Return: pointer to STA if found, otherwise %NULL. 6449 */ 6450 struct ieee80211_sta * 6451 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6452 const u8 *addr, 6453 const u8 *localaddr, 6454 unsigned int *link_id); 6455 6456 /** 6457 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up 6458 * @hw: the hardware 6459 * @pubsta: the station 6460 * @block: whether to block or unblock 6461 * 6462 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues 6463 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before 6464 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be 6465 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected 6466 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag. 6467 * 6468 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free 6469 * manner. 6470 * 6471 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames 6472 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not 6473 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call 6474 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to 6475 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the 6476 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must 6477 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will 6478 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if 6479 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also 6480 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver 6481 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after 6482 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually 6483 * woke up while blocked or not. 6484 */ 6485 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6486 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block); 6487 6488 /** 6489 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP 6490 * @pubsta: the station 6491 * 6492 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell 6493 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the 6494 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead. 6495 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD. 6496 * 6497 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must 6498 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function 6499 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or 6500 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix! 6501 * 6502 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no 6503 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if 6504 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history 6505 * and restore the _irqsafe version! 6506 */ 6507 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6508 6509 /** 6510 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP 6511 * @pubsta: the station 6512 * @tid: the tid of the NDP 6513 * 6514 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close 6515 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when 6516 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window. 6517 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a 6518 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the 6519 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to 6520 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any 6521 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong. 6522 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame 6523 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save. 6524 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames(). 6525 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver 6526 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call 6527 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent. 6528 */ 6529 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid); 6530 6531 /** 6532 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change 6533 * @pubsta: the station 6534 * 6535 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in 6536 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of 6537 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta. 6538 * 6539 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case 6540 * there is no need to call this function. 6541 */ 6542 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta); 6543 6544 /** 6545 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid 6546 * 6547 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call 6548 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of 6549 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule 6550 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness. 6551 * 6552 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent 6553 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not 6554 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the 6555 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame 6556 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission 6557 * attempts. 6558 * 6559 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or 6560 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available. 6561 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of 6562 * them to 0. 6563 * 6564 * @pubsta: the station 6565 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for 6566 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec) 6567 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec) 6568 */ 6569 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6570 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime); 6571 6572 /** 6573 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device 6574 * 6575 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6576 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 6577 * 6578 * Return: %true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can 6579 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return %false. 6580 */ 6581 bool 6582 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 6583 6584 /** 6585 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device 6586 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6587 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6588 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6589 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6590 * 6591 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; can sleep. 6592 * 6593 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6594 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6595 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device 6596 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. 6597 * 6598 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order 6599 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the 6600 * set_key callback. 6601 */ 6602 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6603 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6604 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6605 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6606 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6607 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6608 void *data), 6609 void *iter_data); 6610 6611 /** 6612 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device 6613 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6614 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all 6615 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key 6616 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function 6617 * 6618 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to 6619 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into 6620 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station 6621 * in removal process will be skipped. 6622 * 6623 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section, 6624 * and thus iter must be atomic. 6625 */ 6626 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6627 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6628 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6629 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6630 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 6631 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key, 6632 void *data), 6633 void *iter_data); 6634 6635 /** 6636 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts 6637 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6638 * @iter: iterator function 6639 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function 6640 * 6641 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and 6642 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other 6643 * places while calling into the driver. 6644 * 6645 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during 6646 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being 6647 * removed. 6648 * 6649 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed 6650 * before the restart are considered already present so will be 6651 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already 6652 * or not. 6653 */ 6654 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic( 6655 struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6656 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6657 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf, 6658 void *data), 6659 void *iter_data); 6660 6661 /** 6662 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template 6663 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 6664 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6665 * 6666 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to 6667 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate 6668 * information. This function must only be called from within the 6669 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function 6670 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return 6671 * %NULL. 6672 * 6673 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error. 6674 */ 6675 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6676 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6677 6678 /** 6679 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons 6680 * 6681 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6682 * 6683 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and 6684 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the 6685 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function. 6686 */ 6687 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6688 6689 /** 6690 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP 6691 * 6692 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6693 * 6694 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and 6695 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver 6696 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost. 6697 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated 6698 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set. 6699 * 6700 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state, 6701 * without connection recovery attempts. 6702 */ 6703 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6704 6705 /** 6706 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection 6707 * 6708 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6709 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired 6710 * 6711 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a 6712 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired. 6713 */ 6714 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect); 6715 6716 /** 6717 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume 6718 * 6719 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6720 * 6721 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume. 6722 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the 6723 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were 6724 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or 6725 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume. 6726 * 6727 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses 6728 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface 6729 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then 6730 * disconnect normally later. 6731 * 6732 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and 6733 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it 6734 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the 6735 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto). 6736 */ 6737 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6738 6739 /** 6740 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after 6741 * hardware restart 6742 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6743 * 6744 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after 6745 * hardware restart. 6746 */ 6747 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6748 6749 /** 6750 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring 6751 * rssi threshold triggered 6752 * 6753 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6754 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type 6755 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available 6756 * @gfp: context flags 6757 * 6758 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality 6759 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform 6760 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold. 6761 */ 6762 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6763 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event, 6764 s32 rssi_level, 6765 gfp_t gfp); 6766 6767 /** 6768 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss 6769 * 6770 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6771 * @gfp: context flags 6772 */ 6773 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp); 6774 6775 /** 6776 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected 6777 * 6778 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6779 * @chanctx_conf: Channel context on which radar is detected. Mandatory to 6780 * pass a valid pointer during MLO. For non-MLO %NULL can be passed 6781 */ 6782 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 6783 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf); 6784 6785 /** 6786 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process 6787 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6788 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not 6789 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is 6790 * false. 6791 * 6792 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel 6793 * and wake up the suspended queues. 6794 */ 6795 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success, 6796 unsigned int link_id); 6797 6798 /** 6799 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error 6800 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6801 * 6802 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel 6803 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send 6804 * a deauth frame in this case. 6805 */ 6806 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 6807 6808 /** 6809 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition 6810 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6811 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0 6812 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode 6813 * 6814 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed 6815 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than 6816 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth. 6817 */ 6818 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 6819 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode); 6820 6821 /** 6822 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start 6823 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6824 */ 6825 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6826 6827 /** 6828 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired 6829 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 6830 */ 6831 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 6832 6833 /** 6834 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions 6835 * 6836 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device 6837 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba 6838 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs 6839 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)." 6840 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and 6841 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation. 6842 * 6843 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6844 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid 6845 * @addr: & to bssid mac address 6846 */ 6847 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap, 6848 const u8 *addr); 6849 6850 /** 6851 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered 6852 * @pubsta: station struct 6853 * @tid: the session's TID 6854 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are 6855 * assumed to be out of the window after the call 6856 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc. 6857 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware 6858 * 6859 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and 6860 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it 6861 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released 6862 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.) 6863 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames) 6864 */ 6865 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid, 6866 u16 ssn, u64 filtered, 6867 u16 received_mpdus); 6868 6869 /** 6870 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame 6871 * 6872 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder 6873 * buffer. 6874 * 6875 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 6876 * @ra: the peer's destination address 6877 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session 6878 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver 6879 */ 6880 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn); 6881 6882 /** 6883 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work 6884 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6885 * @addr: station mac address 6886 * @tid: the rx tid 6887 */ 6888 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr, 6889 unsigned int tid); 6890 6891 /** 6892 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session 6893 * 6894 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6895 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6896 * reordering. 6897 * 6898 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6899 * when they complete AddBa negotiation. 6900 * 6901 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6902 * @addr: station mac address 6903 * @tid: the rx tid 6904 */ 6905 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6906 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6907 { 6908 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6909 return; 6910 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid); 6911 } 6912 6913 /** 6914 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session 6915 * 6916 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including 6917 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx 6918 * reordering. 6919 * 6920 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here 6921 * when they complete DelBa negotiation. 6922 * 6923 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6924 * @addr: station mac address 6925 * @tid: the rx tid 6926 */ 6927 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6928 const u8 *addr, u16 tid) 6929 { 6930 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)) 6931 return; 6932 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS); 6933 } 6934 6935 /** 6936 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout 6937 * 6938 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx 6939 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer. 6940 * 6941 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa. 6942 * 6943 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback 6944 * @addr: station mac address 6945 * @tid: the rx tid 6946 */ 6947 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 6948 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid); 6949 6950 /* Rate control API */ 6951 6952 /** 6953 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo 6954 * 6955 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for. 6956 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on. 6957 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration 6958 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs 6959 * to be filled in 6960 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate 6961 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and 6962 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network. 6963 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the 6964 * RTS threshold 6965 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission 6966 * if the selected rate supports it 6967 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask 6968 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use) 6969 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode 6970 */ 6971 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control { 6972 struct ieee80211_hw *hw; 6973 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband; 6974 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf; 6975 struct sk_buff *skb; 6976 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate; 6977 bool rts, short_preamble; 6978 u32 rate_idx_mask; 6979 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask; 6980 bool bss; 6981 }; 6982 6983 /** 6984 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities 6985 */ 6986 enum rate_control_capabilities { 6987 /** 6988 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: 6989 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable) 6990 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains 6991 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has, 6992 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us. 6993 */ 6994 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0), 6995 /** 6996 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER: 6997 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx 6998 */ 6999 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1), 7000 }; 7001 7002 struct rate_control_ops { 7003 unsigned long capa; 7004 const char *name; 7005 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw); 7006 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv, 7007 struct dentry *debugfsdir); 7008 void (*free)(void *priv); 7009 7010 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp); 7011 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7012 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7013 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta); 7014 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7015 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef, 7016 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7017 u32 changed); 7018 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7019 void *priv_sta); 7020 7021 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv, 7022 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7023 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st); 7024 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7025 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7026 struct sk_buff *skb); 7027 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta, 7028 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc); 7029 7030 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta, 7031 struct dentry *dir); 7032 7033 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta); 7034 }; 7035 7036 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, 7037 enum nl80211_band band, 7038 int index) 7039 { 7040 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index)); 7041 } 7042 7043 static inline s8 7044 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7045 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7046 { 7047 int i; 7048 7049 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7050 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7051 return i; 7052 7053 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */ 7054 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7055 7056 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */ 7057 return 0; 7058 } 7059 7060 static inline 7061 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7062 struct ieee80211_sta *sta) 7063 { 7064 unsigned int i; 7065 7066 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++) 7067 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i)) 7068 return true; 7069 return false; 7070 } 7071 7072 /** 7073 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver 7074 * 7075 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass 7076 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station 7077 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on 7078 * the most recent rate control module decision. 7079 * 7080 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7081 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. 7082 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station. 7083 * 7084 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7085 */ 7086 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7087 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, 7088 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates); 7089 7090 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7091 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops); 7092 7093 static inline bool 7094 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7095 { 7096 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20; 7097 } 7098 7099 static inline bool 7100 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7101 { 7102 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7103 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7104 } 7105 7106 static inline bool 7107 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7108 { 7109 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 && 7110 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq; 7111 } 7112 7113 static inline bool 7114 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7115 { 7116 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40; 7117 } 7118 7119 static inline bool 7120 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf) 7121 { 7122 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) && 7123 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) && 7124 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT); 7125 } 7126 7127 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7128 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p) 7129 { 7130 if (p2p) { 7131 switch (type) { 7132 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION: 7133 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT; 7134 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP: 7135 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO; 7136 default: 7137 break; 7138 } 7139 } 7140 return type; 7141 } 7142 7143 static inline enum nl80211_iftype 7144 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7145 { 7146 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p); 7147 } 7148 7149 /** 7150 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif 7151 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7152 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7153 * 7154 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found 7155 */ 7156 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap * 7157 ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7158 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7159 { 7160 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7161 } 7162 7163 /** 7164 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities 7165 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on 7166 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7167 * 7168 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities 7169 */ 7170 static inline __le16 7171 ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7172 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7173 { 7174 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7175 } 7176 7177 /** 7178 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return ETH capabilities for sband/vif 7179 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on 7180 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from 7181 * 7182 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found 7183 */ 7184 static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap * 7185 ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband, 7186 struct ieee80211_vif *vif) 7187 { 7188 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif)); 7189 } 7190 7191 /** 7192 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data 7193 * 7194 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7195 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0 7196 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group 7197 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group 7198 * 7199 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and 7200 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the 7201 * matching GroupId management frame. 7202 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path. 7203 */ 7204 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id, 7205 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position); 7206 7207 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7208 int rssi_min_thold, 7209 int rssi_max_thold); 7210 7211 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7212 7213 /** 7214 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface 7215 * 7216 * @vif: the specified virtual interface 7217 * 7218 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid. 7219 * 7220 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not 7221 * applicable. 7222 */ 7223 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7224 7225 /** 7226 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup 7227 * @vif: virtual interface 7228 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s) 7229 * @gfp: allocation flags 7230 * 7231 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(). 7232 */ 7233 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7234 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup, 7235 gfp_t gfp); 7236 7237 /** 7238 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission 7239 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7240 * @vif: virtual interface 7241 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver 7242 * @band: the band to transmit on 7243 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to 7244 * 7245 * Return: %true if the skb was prepared, %false otherwise 7246 * 7247 * Note: must be called under RCU lock 7248 */ 7249 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7250 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb, 7251 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta); 7252 7253 /** 7254 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header 7255 * of injected frames. 7256 * 7257 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields, 7258 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure 7259 * of the skb before calling this function. 7260 * 7261 * @skb: packet injected by userspace 7262 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device 7263 * 7264 * Return: %true if the radiotap header was parsed, %false otherwise 7265 */ 7266 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb, 7267 struct net_device *dev); 7268 7269 /** 7270 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state 7271 * 7272 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change 7273 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending 7274 * 7275 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent 7276 * 7277 * private: 7278 * 7279 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors 7280 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA 7281 */ 7282 struct ieee80211_noa_data { 7283 u32 next_tsf; 7284 bool has_next_tsf; 7285 7286 u8 absent; 7287 7288 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7289 struct { 7290 u32 start; 7291 u32 duration; 7292 u32 interval; 7293 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX]; 7294 }; 7295 7296 /** 7297 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE 7298 * 7299 * @attr: P2P NoA IE 7300 * @data: NoA tracking data 7301 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7302 * 7303 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors 7304 */ 7305 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr, 7306 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7307 7308 /** 7309 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change 7310 * 7311 * @data: NoA tracking data 7312 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp 7313 */ 7314 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf); 7315 7316 /** 7317 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation 7318 * @vif: virtual interface 7319 * @peer: the peer's destination address 7320 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation 7321 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown 7322 * @gfp: allocation flags 7323 * 7324 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request(). 7325 */ 7326 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer, 7327 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper, 7328 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp); 7329 7330 /** 7331 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID 7332 * 7333 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from 7334 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such 7335 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID, 7336 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks 7337 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be 7338 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC. 7339 * 7340 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it 7341 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should 7342 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7343 * 7344 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for 7345 * @tid: the TID to reserve 7346 * 7347 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure 7348 */ 7349 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7350 7351 /** 7352 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID 7353 * 7354 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function 7355 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for 7356 * preventing use of this TID in the driver. 7357 * 7358 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called 7359 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called 7360 * from the driver's @sta_state callback. 7361 * 7362 * @sta: the station 7363 * @tid: the TID to unreserve 7364 */ 7365 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid); 7366 7367 /** 7368 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7369 * 7370 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7371 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7372 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7373 * 7374 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7375 * 7376 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section, 7377 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in 7378 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the 7379 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call 7380 * but for the duration of the frame handling. 7381 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method, 7382 * rcu_read_lock() is already held. 7383 * 7384 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called. 7385 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead. 7386 */ 7387 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7388 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7389 7390 /** 7391 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue 7392 * (in process context) 7393 * 7394 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context 7395 * (internally disables bottom halves). 7396 * 7397 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7398 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from 7399 * ieee80211_next_txq() 7400 * 7401 * Return: the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available. 7402 */ 7403 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7404 struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7405 { 7406 struct sk_buff *skb; 7407 7408 local_bh_disable(); 7409 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq); 7410 local_bh_enable(); 7411 7412 return skb; 7413 } 7414 7415 /** 7416 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback 7417 * 7418 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7419 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback(). 7420 * 7421 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue 7422 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function. 7423 */ 7424 void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7425 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7426 7427 /** 7428 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from 7429 * 7430 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7431 * @ac: AC number to return packets from. 7432 * 7433 * Return: the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq 7434 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the 7435 * driver has finished scheduling it. 7436 */ 7437 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7438 7439 /** 7440 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs 7441 * 7442 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7443 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for 7444 * 7445 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq(). 7446 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently. 7447 */ 7448 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac); 7449 7450 /* (deprecated) */ 7451 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac) 7452 { 7453 } 7454 7455 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7456 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force); 7457 7458 /** 7459 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission 7460 * 7461 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7462 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7463 * 7464 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled, 7465 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered. 7466 * 7467 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for 7468 * this TXQ internally. 7469 */ 7470 static inline void 7471 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq) 7472 { 7473 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true); 7474 } 7475 7476 /** 7477 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq() 7478 * 7479 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7480 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7481 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets. 7482 * 7483 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ 7484 * internally. 7485 */ 7486 static inline void 7487 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7488 bool force) 7489 { 7490 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force); 7491 } 7492 7493 /** 7494 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit 7495 * 7496 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by 7497 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime 7498 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by 7499 * next_txq(). 7500 * 7501 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to 7502 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have 7503 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will 7504 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit 7505 * again. 7506 * 7507 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be 7508 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates 7509 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry 7510 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this 7511 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets 7512 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq(). 7513 * 7514 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7515 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7516 * 7517 * Return: %true if transmission is allowed, %false otherwise 7518 */ 7519 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7520 struct ieee80211_txq *txq); 7521 7522 /** 7523 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq 7524 * 7525 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e. 7526 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up 7527 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa. 7528 * 7529 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface 7530 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count 7531 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count 7532 */ 7533 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq, 7534 unsigned long *frame_cnt, 7535 unsigned long *byte_cnt); 7536 7537 /** 7538 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination. 7539 * 7540 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination. 7541 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7542 * 7543 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7544 * @inst_id: the local instance id 7545 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*) 7546 * @gfp: allocation flags 7547 */ 7548 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7549 u8 inst_id, 7550 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason, 7551 gfp_t gfp); 7552 7553 /** 7554 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event. 7555 * 7556 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The 7557 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211. 7558 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq. 7559 * 7560 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7561 * @match: match event information 7562 * @gfp: allocation flags 7563 */ 7564 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7565 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match, 7566 gfp_t gfp); 7567 7568 /** 7569 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX. 7570 * 7571 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7572 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length. 7573 * 7574 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7575 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate 7576 * information. 7577 * @len: frame length in bytes 7578 * 7579 * Return: the airtime estimate 7580 */ 7581 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7582 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status, 7583 int len); 7584 7585 /** 7586 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX. 7587 * 7588 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the 7589 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length. 7590 * 7591 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw() 7592 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame. 7593 * @len: frame length in bytes 7594 * 7595 * Return: the airtime estimate 7596 */ 7597 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7598 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, 7599 int len); 7600 /** 7601 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template. 7602 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7603 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7604 * 7605 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7606 * 7607 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error. 7608 */ 7609 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7610 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7611 7612 /** 7613 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast 7614 * probe response template. 7615 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw(). 7616 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7617 * 7618 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb. 7619 * 7620 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error. 7621 */ 7622 struct sk_buff * 7623 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7624 struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7625 7626 /** 7627 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color 7628 * collision. 7629 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO 7630 * 7631 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback. 7632 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is 7633 * aware of. 7634 */ 7635 void 7636 ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7637 u64 color_bitmap, u8 link_id); 7638 7639 /** 7640 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame 7641 * 7642 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with 7643 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames. 7644 * 7645 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted. 7646 * 7647 * Return: %true if @skb is a data frame, %false otherwise 7648 */ 7649 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb) 7650 { 7651 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb); 7652 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data; 7653 7654 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP || 7655 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control); 7656 } 7657 7658 /** 7659 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode 7660 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7661 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7662 * 7663 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; may sleep; calls 7664 * back into the driver. 7665 * 7666 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface 7667 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active), 7668 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links. 7669 * 7670 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same 7671 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get 7672 * a sequence of calls like 7673 * 7674 * - change_vif_links(0x11) 7675 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0) 7676 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4) 7677 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP) 7678 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down) 7679 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0) 7680 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4) 7681 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP) 7682 * - change_vif_links(0x10) 7683 * 7684 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise. 7685 */ 7686 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links); 7687 7688 /** 7689 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links 7690 * @vif: interface to set active links on 7691 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap 7692 * 7693 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only 7694 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and 7695 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be 7696 * completed after it returns. 7697 */ 7698 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, 7699 u16 active_links); 7700 7701 /** 7702 * ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm - tear down a negotiated TTLM request 7703 * @vif: the interface on which the tear down request should be sent. 7704 * 7705 * This function can be used to tear down a previously accepted negotiated 7706 * TTLM request. 7707 */ 7708 void ieee80211_send_teardown_neg_ttlm(struct ieee80211_vif *vif); 7709 7710 /** 7711 * ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw - convert channel width to STA RX bandwidth 7712 * @width: the channel width value to convert 7713 * Return: the STA RX bandwidth value for the channel width 7714 */ 7715 static inline enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth 7716 ieee80211_chan_width_to_rx_bw(enum nl80211_chan_width width) 7717 { 7718 switch (width) { 7719 default: 7720 WARN_ON_ONCE(1); 7721 fallthrough; 7722 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT: 7723 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20: 7724 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20; 7725 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40: 7726 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40; 7727 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80: 7728 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80; 7729 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_160: 7730 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_80P80: 7731 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160; 7732 case NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_320: 7733 return IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320; 7734 } 7735 } 7736 7737 /* for older drivers - let's not document these ... */ 7738 int ieee80211_emulate_add_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7739 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 7740 void ieee80211_emulate_remove_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7741 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx); 7742 void ieee80211_emulate_change_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7743 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx, 7744 u32 changed); 7745 int ieee80211_emulate_switch_vif_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, 7746 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs, 7747 int n_vifs, 7748 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode); 7749 7750 #endif /* MAC80211_H */ 7751